JP6792164B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding game machines.

In recent years, as a pachinko game machine, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is made when a game ball enters the starting port on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, a big hit (special game). ) The mainstream is a pachinko game machine that shifts to the state and can win a large number of prize balls by opening the large prize opening provided on the game board surface. Among the pachinko gaming machines configured in this way, a time-shortening gaming state that increases the efficiency of the probability fluctuation game state that increases the winning probability in the jackpot lottery and the symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. There are also game machines that enhance the interest of the game by creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player based on these game states. Then, in order to enhance the effect of the sound, the player can select the music to be played by operating the operation member, and there is also one configured to further enhance the interest of the game.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-066304

However, since many such game machines have existed in the past, there is a problem that it is desired to develop a model that realizes further novel game playability.

The gaming machine according to this aspect
An effect display device (for example, an effect display device SG) that displays a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game,
A speaker (for example, speaker D24) that outputs a predetermined production sound according to the progress of the game, and
It is equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, sub-input button SB, cross key SB-2).
It has a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state.
Has a special game that is executed by winning a lottery in a normal state or a special state,
After the special game is over, the special state can be executed,
During the special game, the BGM selection screen for changing the BGM output from the speaker {for example, BGM (Back Ground Music), music} can be displayed on the effect display device.
When the BGM selection screen is displayed, the BGM that can be output can be selected by operating the operation means.
In the situation where the BGM selection screen is displayed, the selected BGM can be determined after a predetermined time has elapsed.
When the operation means is operated and the BGM selection is changed in the situation where the BGM selection screen is displayed, the BGM can be output from the output start point of the selected BGM.
In the situation where the BGM selection screen is displayed, when a predetermined time elapses and the selected BGM is determined, the BGM is output from the beginning of the determined BGM.
In the situation where the BGM selection screen is displayed, if the power is cut off when the predetermined time has not passed and the BGM has not been determined, and then the power is restored, the notification is output only when the power is restored. Is configured so that BGM cannot be selected while executing
The BGM data used when the operation means is operated and the BGM selection is changed in the situation where the BGM selection screen is displayed is predetermined in the situation where the BGM selection screen is displayed. This data is different from the BGM data used when the selected BGM is determined over time.
In the situation where the BGM selection screen is displayed, the BGM data used when the operating means is operated and the BGM selection is changed is composed of at least a time longer than a predetermined time.
The BGM selected during the special game can be output even in the special state executed after the end of the special game, and when a new special game is executed during the special state, the new special game is executed. It can be output even during special games,
The BGM selected during the special game can be continuously output at a lower volume than during the special game even during the end effect executed at the end of the special game, while is executed after the end of the special game. It is a game machine characterized in that it is not output during the start effect executed at the start of a new special game executed during the special state.

According to the game machine according to this aspect, further novel game playability can be realized in the game machine adopting the concept of creating a game progress state which is advantageous for the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an operation diagram of a sub-input button and a lever in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a channel configuration image diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the main processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of NMI interrupt processing (at the time of power interruption) on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a prize ball payout command transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a payout control board transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is an image diagram relating to the prize ball payout command and the payout-related information on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the ball entry detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a main game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the first (second) winning opening ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of a general winning opening ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of an out-port / in-ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a prize ball number determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of an electric accessory drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of error management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the firing control signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the management operation control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is an image diagram of a management menu screen display in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the power saving mode switching control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the non-game period control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of customized control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the customized guidance screen display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a customized guide screen image FIG. 1 of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the display control process during customization execution on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is a customized guide screen image FIG. 2 of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the customized control process during the game on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the music selection process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of a music selection process during a big hit on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the music selection process during the auxiliary game state on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a music selection screen image FIG. 1 (during a big hit) in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a music selection screen image FIG. 2 (during a short time) in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a music selection screen image FIG. 3 in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a music list in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a music transition diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the effect operation content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is an effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of a button effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of a single-shot push effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of a continuous hitting effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of a long press effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 63 is an image diagram of automatic button operation execution in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of a hidden button effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 65 is a hidden button effect image FIG. 1 in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the background image display process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the illumination lamp operation control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 69 is an illumination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the volume control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 71 is a volume determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 72 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the non-game period control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of a right-handed instruction display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of a continuous hitting effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 76 is an example of display priorities applicable to this example. FIG. 77 is a hidden button effect image FIG. 2 in the pachinko game machine according to this example. FIG. 78 is a hidden button effect image FIG. 3 in the pachinko game machine according to this example. FIG. 79 is a hidden button effect image FIG. 4 in the pachinko game machine according to this example. FIG. 80 is a hidden button effect image FIG. 5 in the pachinko game machine according to this example. FIG. 81 is a customized guide screen image FIG. 3 of the pachinko game machine according to this example. FIG. 82 is an example of an automatic continuous hitting effect in the pachinko game machine according to this example. FIG. 83 is a game flow in the pachinko game machine according to this example. FIG. 84 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 85 is a music selection screen image FIG. 4 (small hit during a short time) in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 86 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart of a game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 90 is a volume transition diagram of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 91 is an example of using a button image in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment.

Form to carry out

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. "Prize ball" includes not only a prize in which a prize ball is paid out, but also a passage to a "through chucker" in which no prize ball is paid out. The "identification information" may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but preferably visual information such as numbers, letters, and patterns. Those having a shape such as, etc. can be mentioned. Further, in the present specification, the "identification information" may be referred to as a main game symbol / special symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (designation), but the "special symbol (special symbol)" is a main control board. The identification information is displayed and controlled on the side, and the "decorative pattern (designation)" is the identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. "Displayable identification information" is not limited to the display method, and includes, for example, light emission of light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment display) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also the difference in color) and physics. Display (for example, the symbol drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position) and the like. "Direction" refers to display content that enhances the enjoyment of the game, for example, moving images such as animations and live-action photographs, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, etc., including identification information fluctuation / stop, notice, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), the open state = easy winning state, and the closed state = non-winning state. It will be in an easy state. Further, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advanced state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (the side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as an evacuation state). In a configuration that can take (there is) (so-called tongue-type attacker), the advance state = the winning easy state, and the evacuation state = the winning non-easy state. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by a computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard random number). Random numbers, soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, the "winning random number (random number for winning / failing lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol are determined. "Random number for determining variable mode", "Random number for determining stop symbol", "Random number for determining winning symbol" for determining whether to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variable game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode, the content of the definite identification information, and the like, and at least one random number that is the same as or different from each other may be used. Further, in the present specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once the entry port (for example, the start entry port) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers such as winning random number + fluctuation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... is called one random number). .. Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The "gaming state" is, for example, a transition to a special gaming state in which the large winning opening can be opened, or a transition to a special gaming state rather than a non-probability variable gaming state in which the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Probability fluctuation game state with high probability of lottery, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning a prize at the start port that triggers the lottery (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the start port In some cases, any one or a plurality of combinations such as a long opening period of the variable member, a high probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and a short time of notifying the result of the opening lottery of the variable member). "Adjusting the volume level" is to change all the volumes including the maximum volume that can be output. For example, when the maximum volume is changed from "90 dB" to "80 dB" by adjusting the volume level. The volume output in the situation where the maximum volume is during super reach production is changed from "90 dB" to "80 dB", and the volume output during the fluctuation of the decorative pattern that does not cause the reach fluctuation is "50 dB". The maximum volume and the volume other than the maximum volume are changed by adjusting the volume level, such as from "40 dB" to "40 dB". "Adjusting the amount of light" means changing all the amount of light including the maximum amount of light that can be output. For example, by adjusting the amount of light, the maximum amount of light is changed from "brightness 10" to "brightness 7". In that case, the amount of light in the situation where the maximum amount of light is reached, such as during super reach production, changes from "brightness 10" to "brightness 7", and the amount of light, etc. during fluctuations in the decorative pattern that does not cause reach fluctuation changes from "brightness 7" to "brightness". The maximum amount of light and the amount of light that is not the maximum amount of light can be changed by adjusting the amount of light, such as "5". The "automatic operation state" is a state in which the auto button operation setting is on, and a cut-in effect or the like is executed without operating the sub input button SB or the lever SB-3 during the button validity period. ing. The "non-automatic operation state" is a state in which the auto button operation setting is off, and the cut-in effect or the like is not executed unless the sub input button SB or the lever SB-3 is operated during the button validity period. There is.

The following embodiment is a model (type 1 type 1 multifunction device) in which two conventional type 1 pachinko game machines are mixed. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also within the range when applied to other game machines (for example, conventional pachinko game machines such as type 1, type 2, type 3, general electric service). .. It should be noted that this embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function where each means exists, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. It is not limited to the following aspects. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and the other modified example is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are also not limited, and the lottery table may be used as a reference table or vice versa. Further, the term "table" in this example is not limited to the format, and one or more selection candidates are selected from a plurality of selection candidates based on one or more pieces of information. It should be understood that it is an associated aspect. Further, the numerical values as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modification {for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol variation time, number of continuations in each game state, etc.} are It is just an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, by the conditions of the first main game side and the second main game side, by the conditions of the probability fluctuation game and the non-probability fluctuation game, and the time reduction game and the non-time reduction game). It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in (Conditions with time-saving games, etc.) may be changed as appropriate as long as they do not deviate significantly from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples. Should. For example, the magnitude relationship between the first main game side and the second main game side in terms of the winning probability at the time of lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of special game is that the first main game side = the second main game side. Even if it is illustrated as such, even if the magnitude relationship is appropriately changed such that the first main game side <second main game side, or the first main game side> second main game side. Good (same for other numbers and conditions). Further, for example, when the number of continuations of the probability fluctuation game state is configured based on the purpose of continuing until the next big hit occurs, whether to set "65535" as the number of continuations (configured to substantially continue). Alternatively, even in the option of the realization method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability fluctuation game state until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples is not significantly deviated. Should be understood that may be changed as appropriate.

Here, before explaining each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, with reference to FIG. 1, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine is mainly composed of a game machine frame and a game board D35. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

First, the game machine frame of the pachinko game machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball plate D20, a lower ball plate D22, and a launch handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be openable and closable via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating a game board D35, a mechanism for guiding or collecting a game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball plate D20 has a mechanism for storing the game ball, sending the game ball to the launch rail, and extracting the game ball from the lower ball plate D22. The lower ball plate D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, speakers D24 are provided on the upper right and upper left of the game board D35, and sound effects corresponding to the game state and the like are output.

The game board D35 and the transparent plate D16 (for example, a glass plate) on the front surface of the game machine are attached to the game machine frame so as to be parallel to each other while maintaining a distance of more than 13 mm and not more than 25 mm (19 mm in this example). Has been done. Here, the game board D35 is firmly fixed by a fixing mechanism (not shown) so as not to be easily shaken.

Further, the transparent plate D16 (for example, a glass plate) does not obstruct the view of the entire structure of the game board, and the entire game area is colorless and transparent so that the position of the game ball on the game board can be confirmed so that there is no unevenness. It is formed.

In the ball plate (for example, upper ball plate D20, lower ball plate D22), the game balls on the ball plate are visible to the player (the number of game balls can be roughly confirmed), and the game received by the player in the saucer. It has a shape that does not hinder the removal of the ball (a shape that allows the game ball to be freely taken out).

Next, in the game board D35, a game area D30 divided by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34 is formed, and a game ball that flows down on the game board D35 (on the game area D30) via the transparent plate D16. You can check the position of. The game area D30 is roughly divided into a left-handed area DL10 and a right-handed area DR10. Then, in the game area D30, in addition to mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning openings, left-handed route ML10, right-handed route MR10, first main game starting port A10, and second main game Starting port B10, auxiliary game starting port H10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol A display device H20, a center decoration D38, a movable body accessory YK, a right general winning opening lamp LP10, a left general winning opening P10, a right general winning opening P20, a sub input button SB, and an out opening D36 are installed. In the present embodiment, the left-handed route ML10 may be referred to as a first flow-down route, and the right-handed route MR10 may be referred to as a second flow-down route. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 includes a first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start port entry detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information.

Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start port entry detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the second main game start port B10, and the second main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is variable to a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the closed state.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (left-handed area DL10) is the first. While it is easy to be guided to the main game start port A10, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (right-handed area DR10) is not easily guided to the first main game start port A10. Further, both the game ball flowing down on the left side of the game area D30 and the game ball flowing down on the right side of the game area D30 are configured to be guided to the second main game start port B10.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game start port B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game start port A10 side. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to overlap each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port A10 and the first main game start port A10 are not limited to this. 2 The main game start port B10 may be arranged apart from each other.

Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start opening H10, and generates auxiliary game start opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10, and the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is used. It is configured so that the flowing game ball is less likely to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball flowing down the right side and the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) may be configured to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10.

Next, the left general winning opening P10 includes a left general winning opening ball detection device P11s. The left general winning opening ball detection device P11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the left general winning opening P10, and generates left general winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. A predetermined number (for example, 3 balls) of game balls will be paid out as prize balls by entering the game balls into the left general winning opening P10. The game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easy to enter the left general winning opening P10, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is on the left. It is configured so that it is difficult to enter the general winning opening P10. That is, when left-handed (to launch the game ball by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left-handed area DL10 (left-handed route ML10) on the left side of the game area D30). It is configured so that it is easy to enter the left general winning opening P10.

Next, the right general winning opening P20 includes a right general winning opening ball detection device P21s. The right general winning opening ball detection device P21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the right general winning opening P20, and generates right general winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. Here, the right general winning opening P20 is arranged in the right-handed area DR10, and has both the role of the auxiliary game starting opening for acquiring the auxiliary game random number and the role of the general winning opening for paying out the prize ball. There is. In other words, the right general winning opening ball detection device P21s serves as both an auxiliary game starting opening sensor described later and a general winning opening sensor described later. That is, the entry of the game ball into the right general winning opening P20 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d attached to the second main game starting opening B10. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, 2 balls) of game balls will be paid out as prize balls by entering the game balls into the right general winning opening P20. The game ball (for example, 2 balls) paid out as a prize ball from the right general winning opening P20 by the entry of the game ball into the right general winning opening P20 is determined by the entry of the game ball into the left general winning opening P10. , It is configured to be less than the game balls (for example, 3 balls) paid out as prize balls from the left general winning opening P10. In this embodiment, the game ball that has been hit right can enter the right general winning opening P20. That is, when right-handed (to launch the game ball by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right-handed area DR10 (right-handed route MR10) on the right side of the game area D30) is executed. It is configured so that it is easy to enter the right general winning opening P20.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the entry openings that can be entered when the right-handed hit is executed, in order from the upstream, "auxiliary game start opening H10 → right general winning opening P20 → second major winning opening C20 → The order is as follows: 1st prize opening C10 → 2nd main game start opening B10 → out opening D36 ”. Further, since the auxiliary game start port H10 has the shape of a gate, the game ball that has passed through the auxiliary game start port H10 will further flow down on the game area, and the ball entry port located downstream (the right described above). It will be possible to enter the general winning opening P20, etc.). On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the right general winning opening P20 will flow into the back side of the game board surface, and will not subsequently enter the first major winning opening C10 or the second major winning opening C20 (right-handed execution is performed). Then, the game ball that did not enter the right general winning opening P20 can enter the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20).

When a left-handed player is executed in the non-time-reduced game state (the game proceeds by left-handed player in the non-time-reduced game state), the game ball enters the auxiliary game start opening H10 (and the right general winning opening P20). The second main game start port electric accessory B11d is difficult to open because it is difficult to open, and the game proceeds mainly by entering the first main game start port A10 as the start port on the main game side. When right-handed is executed in the time-reduced game state (the game is advanced by right-handed in the time-reduced game state), the game ball easily enters the auxiliary game start opening H10 (and the right general winning opening P20). 2 Main game start port The electric accessory B11d is easy to open, and the game proceeds mainly by entering the second main game start port B10 as the start port on the main game side. In addition, the game ball is launched by right-handed in the time-reduced game state, rather than the ease of entering the first main game start port A10 when the game ball is continuously fired by left-handed in the non-time-reduced game state. It is easier to enter the second main game start port B10 when the game is continued, in other words, the first main game starts when the game ball is continuously fired by left-handed in the non-time shortened game state. The first main game start port A10 or the second main game start when the game ball is continuously fired by right-handed in a time-shortening game state rather than the ease of entering the mouth A10 or the second main game start port B10. The ease of entering the ball into the mouth B10 is higher. Therefore, in this example, the number of prize balls (3 balls in this example) when the ball is entered into the left general winning opening P10, which is easier to enter when the left-handed hit is executed, is right-handed. By designing more than the number of prize balls (2 balls in this example) when entering the right general winning opening P20, which is easier to enter during execution than when executing left-handed, the non-time reduction game state The difference between the average number of prize balls paid out by entering the winning opening, that is, the base, between the case where the game is played with a left-handed hit and the case where the game is played with a right-handed hit in a time-saving game state. It is possible to prevent the difference between the values (the expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out with respect to the 100 game balls fired in the situation where the special game is not won) becomes too large.

Further, the right general winning opening lamp LP10 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal, an LED, or the like, and is configured so that it can be turned on when a game ball enters the right general winning opening during execution of a special game. .. Further, the difference in the lighting color of the right general winning opening lamp LP10 is configured to suggest whether to shift to the probability-variable gaming state or the non-probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game. Specifically, it tends to light up in red when it becomes a probability-changing game state after the end of the special game being executed, and lights up in blue when it becomes a non-probability-variable game state after the end of the special game being executed. By easily configuring it, it can be configured as "red: high expectation of being in a probability-variable game state after the end of the special game, blue: low expectation of being in a probability-variable game state after the end of the special game". As the lighting color of the right general winning opening lamp LP10, three or more kinds of lighting colors may be provided. The right general winning opening lamp LP10 may be provided in the left-handed area DL10 or the right-handed area DR10 on the game area D30. Further, it may be provided in an area other than the game area D30. In this example, the non-probability variable gaming state is defined as a normal state, a normal gaming state, a normal time, a low probability, a low probability state, a low probability gaming state, a low probability time, a non-probability change, a low probability lottery state, and a low probability. It may be referred to as medium, normal, low probability, non-probability change, etc. Further, the probability fluctuating gaming state may be referred to as a high probability, a high probability state, a high probability gaming state, a high probability time, a probability change, a high probability lottery state, a high probability middle, a probability change middle, or the like. In addition, the time-saving game state may be referred to as a time-saving state, a time-saving medium, a time-saving, a high base, an electric support medium, or the like. In addition, the non-time saving game state may be referred to as a non-time saving state, a non-time saving medium, a non-time saving medium, a low base medium, a non-electric support medium, or the like. Further, the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state may be referred to as a normal state, a normal gaming state, a normal time, a normal mode, or the like.

In addition, the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route MR10 passes through the right-handed route outlet D50 and flows down to the vicinity of the right general winning opening P20, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20, and the like. It will be.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are provided on the upper right side of the out opening D36, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) , It is configured so that it can easily pass through the area where the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape and is an out opening that opens when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located on the upper right side of D36. As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening C10 includes a first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a first large winning opening electric accessory C11d {and a first large winning opening. The mouth electric accessory solenoid C13} is provided. Here, the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. The first large winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first large winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first large winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (the first). 1 Grand prize opening Electric accessory solenoid C13 is excited and changed). In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Not limited to. In that case, for example, an advance state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and an evacuation state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). A tongue-type attacker) or an opening on the passage where the game ball can roll is used as a large winning opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called sliding attacker). It is often suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning opening C20 forms a horizontal rectangular shape and goes out, which is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the jackpot symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located on the upper right side of the opening D36. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20 includes a second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the winning of a game ball, a second large winning opening electric accessory C21d {and a second large winning opening. The mouth electric accessory solenoid C23} is provided. Here, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. Then, the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d has the second big winning opening C20 in the normal state where the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win in the second big winning opening C20 and the open state where the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Not limited to. In that case, for example, an advance state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). A tongue-type attacker) or an opening on the passage where the game ball can roll is used as a large winning opening, and the opening may be closed or opened (so-called sliding attacker). , It is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes the displayed display. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game symbol display unit B21g. It is provided with a symbol holding display unit A21h (second main game symbol holding display unit B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display unit A21h (second main game symbol hold display unit B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lamps lit is the first main game (second main game). Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers related to (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbol that has not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 kinds of numbers of "" and "-" of the loss {However, it is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED is displayed so that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. Further, the holding number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, and can display a maximum of four holding numbers (for example, it is composed of one lamp and is held. Number 1: Lighting, Hold number 2: Low speed blinking, Hold number 3: Medium speed blinking, Hold number 4: High speed blinking).

Since the main game symbol does not necessarily have to have a directing role, the size of the first main game symbol display device A20 is set to an inconspicuous degree in the present embodiment. However, in the case of adopting a method in which the main game symbol itself has a directing role and the decorative symbol is not displayed, the main game symbol is displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the effect display device SG described later. It may be configured as.

Next, the effect display device SG is a device that displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the display area SG10 includes, for example, a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbol fluctuations imitating a game of a slot machine, a first hold display unit SG12 for displaying main game hold information, and the like. It has a second hold display unit SG13. Although the effect display device SG is composed of a liquid crystal display in this embodiment, it may be composed of other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display unit SG12 and the second hold display unit SG13 are each composed of four lamps, and the lamps are interlocked with the hold lamps of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of reserved auxiliary game symbol changes (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes that have not been executed). In the present embodiment, there are two entry ports, an auxiliary game start opening H10 and a right general winning opening P20, as entry openings from which auxiliary game random numbers can be obtained, and any of the two entry openings The display related to the acquired auxiliary game random number will be displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 even when the ball is entered into the ball.

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of a game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 and / or the game area D30, and plays a role of directing by blinking or the like.

Next, the movable body accessory YK is installed in the vicinity of the effect display device SG, and plays a role of driving and enlivening the game when the effect is executed due to the symbol change. It is preferable that the device is moved in the vertical direction, driven by rotation, or lit so that the drive is conspicuous, and the drive is easy to drive due to a symbol variation with a high expectation of a big hit.

Next, the sub-input button SB is an operation member that is electrically connected to the sub-control board S, and by operating (pressing), an effect based on the operation is executed. The operation modes of the sub-input button SB include a single press (an operation mode in which the sub-input button SB is pressed only once for a short time), repeated hits (an operation mode in which the sub-input button SB is pressed multiple times), and a long press. (Operation mode in which the sub input button SB is held down for a predetermined period of time) and. Further, the operating members electrically connected to the sub-control board S and for which the effect based on the operation is executed by operating (pressing) are not limited to the sub-input button SB, but are up and down. The cross key SB-2, which has four operation units, left and right, and allows you to select the effect (notice effect, etc.) to be executed by operating the operation unit, by pulling it toward you. It is configured to have a lever SB-3 on which an effect (movable body accessory operates, etc.) is executed.

Next, the out port D36 is an entry port provided below the game area D30, and the game ball that has flowed down without entering any of the winning openings provided in the game area D30 enters the ball. It is a ball opening, and when a game ball enters the out opening D36, various lottery based on random numbers and prize balls based on the entering ball are not executed, and the game ball is discharged to the outside of the game machine. Become. In this embodiment, the out port D36 for entering the game ball that did not win the winning opening is provided only at the bottom of the game board, but the out opening is provided at a predetermined position on the upper part of the game board. It is also possible. In that case, in order to clarify that the entrance is not a winning opening, it is desirable not to be confused with the winning opening, such as by displaying "OUT" with a sticker.

Next, the power saving mode display lamp (for example, composed of LEDs) D70 is configured to light up based on whether or not the power saving mode (details will be described later) is on.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine, and controls the overall game operation (that is, the game) such as a lottery when the ball enters the first main game start port A10 (second main game start port B10). Main control board M that performs control that is directly related to the interests of the person, and effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control related to various effects on the effect display device SG that gives interest to the game content. The SM, the sub-sub control unit SS that mainly executes the effect display, the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT according to the prizes in each winning opening are placed on the upper ball plate D20. The prize ball payout device (set base) KE provided with the payout unit KE10 and the like, the prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and the game ball (storage ball) of the upper ball plate D20 are played. The launcher D42 that launches one ball at a time to the area D30, the launch control board D40 that controls the launch operation of the launcher D42, the power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko game machine, and the power of the pachinko game machine are turned on. A power switch Ea or the like, which is a switch to turn off, is provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the game side).

Next, FIG. 3 is an operation diagram of the sub-input button SB and the lever SB-3 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1, the sub-input button SB and the lever SB-3 are arranged on the front surface of the game machine, and the sub-input button SB and the lever SB-3 are integrated so as to be one member. It is composed of. First, the operation mode of the sub-input button SB will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 3A, the lever SB-3 is housed inside the member forming the upper ball plate D20 (referred to as a stored state). The lever SB-3 is in the retracted state during most of the game, such as when the main game symbol is stopped. Further, the lever SB-3 is configured so that the operation is not detected even if the lever SB-3 is operated in the retracted state (the effect based on the operation is not executed). On the other hand, the sub-input button SB can be operated when the lever SB-3 is in the retracted state, and the operation can be detected by pressing the sub-input button SB. Button validity period in the execution variation of the button single-shot effect described later (the operation of the sub-input button SB in the symbol variation that executes the button single-shot effect, button repeated press effect, button long-press effect, or hidden button effect described later. By operating the sub-input button SB in the period (the period during which the effect is executed by operating the sub-input button SB), the effect based on the operation is executed. The period during which the operation of the lever SB-3 is accepted due to the symbol variation for executing the lever effect described later is referred to as the lever effective period.

Next, the operation mode of the lever SB-3 will be described in detail. FIG. 3C is in the same state as FIG. 6A. In this state, the lever SB-3 cannot be operated, or even if it is operated, the effect is not executed. Next, as shown in FIG. 3D, when the lever effective period (the period during which the operation of the lever SB-3 is effective) in the symbol variation in which the lever effect is executed is reached (timing 1 second before the lever effective period). The lever SB-3 is driven so as to protrude from the member forming the upper ball plate D20 (this state is referred to as a protruding state), and the lever SB-3 is as shown in FIG. By being in the protruding state, it is possible to pull the player toward the front when viewed from the player. By pulling the lever SB-3 during the lever effective period in the lever effect, the input of the lever SB-3 is detected, and the effect based on the operation of the lever SB-3 is executed. It should be noted that the jackpot expectation of the symbol variation when the lever effect is executed during the symbol variation is higher than the jackpot expectation of the symbol variation when the button single-shot effect is executed during the symbol variation. It is desirable to configure it as follows. In addition, it is preferable that the lever production looks more flashy to the player than the single button production. The operating modes of the lever SB-3 during the lever effective period include single-shot pulling (operation mode in which the lever SB-3 is pulled only once for a short time) and continuous pulling (operation mode in which the lever SB-3 is pulled multiple times). , Prolonged (operation mode in which the lever SB-3 is continuously pulled for a predetermined period). In addition, the lever single-shot pulling effect, which is a lever effect that executes single-shot pulling, the lever continuous pulling effect, which is a lever effect that executes continuous pulling, and the lever long-pulling effect, which is a lever effect that executes long-lasting, are the patterns being executed. It may be configured so that the jackpot expectation of fluctuation is different.

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment pays out the game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of decorative patterns based on the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the main control board M, the sound from the speaker D24, The sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are arranged on one board) that controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26 and the execution of error notification, etc., and these It is mainly composed of a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire game machine including a control board. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of decorative patterns, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. It is provided with two control units, a sub-sub control unit SS, which executes display processing such as variable display / stop display, hold display, and notice display of decorative symbols on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores in advance a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, and a CPU. It is equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores the data handled by the CPU (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.). Hereinafter, the schematic configuration of each substrate and the electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined.

First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game starting port entry ball detecting device A11s, the second main game starting opening ball entry detecting device B11s, the auxiliary game starting opening ball entry detecting device H11s, the first 1 large prize opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd large winning opening winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device (not shown, the general winning opening is a entry opening that has a prize ball but does not draw a symbol. The progress of the game, such as a drive solenoid (not shown), a drive solenoid (not shown), a drive solenoid (the above-mentioned first prize opening electric accessory solenoid C13, a second prize opening electric accessory solenoid C23, etc.), an information display LED (not shown), etc. It is electrically connected to the input / output device that is indispensable for the game, and controls the progress of the game based on the input signal from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS), and the prize ball is paid out based on the progress of the game. Information (commands) related to the above and the like can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the progress state of the production / game can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal by wiring. It is configured to be able to output game-related information to an external device.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 4, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main are configured. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes the payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by the player and receives a game ball lending request to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R for transmission. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (launch handle, launch motor, ball feeding device) are provided. Etc.) are also connected. In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is separated and adjacent to the game machine, but it may be integrated with the game machine. In that case, the game ball lending control board KH is used for lending. Control and management of recording media for lending electronic money and the like may be supervised.

Next, as described above, the sub-control board S includes an effect display device SG for displaying decorative symbols and the like, a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, a drive device for effect such as a movable body accessory YK, and power saving. The mode display lamp D70, the volume switch V10 that can change the volume output from the speaker D24 by operating it and can be operated only by the administrator, and the button effect (button single press effect, button repeated press effect, button length). It is configured to change the execution mode of the effect by operating it in the push effect, hidden button effect), and by operating it on the customization execution screen, volume control screen, light amount adjustment screen, etc. The sub-input button SB, the cross key SB-2, and the lever SB-3, which are configured so that the settings can be changed (details will be described later), are connected (in this example, there are three operating members). It is provided). The sub-input button SB and the cross key SB-2 are configured to be turned on by pressing them, and the lever SB-3 is configured to be turned on by pulling the lever toward the front side when viewed from the player. As described above, the sub input button SB and the lever SB-3 are integrated into one mechanism. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and the sub-main control unit SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( Illuminations) Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of the display content to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured in. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated by the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). It may be possible, but by configuring it to be integrated, there are merits such as space merit and reduction of the situation where noise is mixed in the wiring etc.). Further, the division of work between the two control units can be appropriately changed, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit integrated with the VDP is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H). It is connected to the sub-main control unit SM (secondary game control means SM) related to the production and the prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. Further, the sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) that executes the image effect, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), the speaker D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to the prize ball payout device KE provided with a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub-main control unit SM (secondary game control means SM), the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. It is composed of elements such as a ROM and RAM to be used, and a CPU used for arithmetic processing. It should be noted that each means included in the main control board M below may be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in the peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be mounted on the main control board M. The details of each of the above means (devices) will be described below.

The scope of the claims and the "random numbers" in the present specification are, for example, "0" to "65535" and "0" to "0" to "random numbers" assigned according to the type of random number (for example, winning random number or variation mode determination random number). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as "255". Further, the random number does not have to be a random number generated mathematically, and may be a pseudo-random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the values are expressed in sequence along the sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed. ) Is determined by a random value (initial value update method), a combination thereof, and the like.

Here, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment has a timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) for managing fluctuations of the first and second main game symbols that can be cleared to zero. Further, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment further includes an auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time. Further, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment has a second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B for measuring the drive (opening) time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10. doing. Further, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment has a winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time.

Here, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment has a time reduction counter MP52c capable of counting the time reduction number. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability-changing game (probability-changing game state) in which the lottery probability for a special game is higher than that in a normal game, or a fluctuation time of a main game symbol is relative to that in a normal game. This refers to a short time-shortening game (time-shortening game state) or a time when the opening time extension function is activated, in which the opening time of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is relatively longer than that during the normal game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) during the time reduction game as compared with the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the winning probability of the auxiliary game symbol becomes the probability fluctuation game state (auxiliary game probability change function). Further, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened (auxiliary game time shortening function), and the opening extension time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10 is relatively extended (opening time). Extension function). Further, the time-saving game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number of times. That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted for each change (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. In addition, even if the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment has a function of performing a transition lottery from a specific game (for example, a probability fluctuation game or a time reduction game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability each time the symbol changes. Good (in the case of a so-called pachinko game machine having a fall lottery function).

Next, game peripherals will be described. Since the detailed configurations of some peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly described. First, the game peripherals include a first main game peripheral device A which is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B which is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a first main game side. The first and second main game shared peripheral devices C, which are the shared peripheral devices on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM, and the sub-sub control unit. It has SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM includes the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a time-synchronized manner, and the result of the game. It is related to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start port A10 that triggers a transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 capable of stopping display and variable display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers a transition to a special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of stopping display and variable display of the second main game symbol. And have.

Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral devices C are in a closed state during a normal game, and are opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And has a second big winning opening C20.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H has an auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and a stop display and a variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of

Here, the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t is configured to measure the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variablely displaying the decorative symbol, and a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) for displaying the main game hold information. ing.

The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit). ) SS is connected to the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS controls the sub-game. Means (sub-main control unit) It means that it is controlled by SM. It should be noted that the main control board M may be configured to control another peripheral device via another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

Next, FIG. 5 is a channel configuration image diagram. First, when a sound reproduction command (for example, a sound number, a channel number to be used) is transmitted from the sub-main control unit SM or the sub-sub control unit SS to the sound control unit SO, the sound control unit SO reproduces the transmitted sound. Load sound data from the sound source ROM into the control register based on the command (for example, based on the sound number) {For example, load the sound data contained in the sound source file (for example, WAV file) corresponding to the sound number. }. Here, as shown in the "sound source ROM data image", the sound source ROM contains various information corresponding to the sound number {for example, the number of channels to be occupied by the sound data (the number of simultaneously used channels). , Designation of whether to return to the beginning and play back after playing all the sound data (presence or absence of loop)}, and the sound data playback process can be executed based on these various information. Then, in the sound data reproduction process, the loaded digital signal sound data (see the figure "digital signal image") is converted into an analog signal (see the figure "analog signal image") via the DAC. Then, it is realized by outputting to the left speaker SOsL and / or the right speaker SOsR. The lower part of the figure is an image of the channels and the control register. Since a total of 24 channels are connected from the control register to the left speaker SOsL and the right speaker SOsR, 12 channels each, a total of 24 channels are connected, so monaural output (simultaneous use channels). If the number = 1), a maximum of 24 types of sound data can be simultaneously reproduced, and if the stereo output (number of simultaneously used channels = 2), a maximum of 12 types of sound data can be simultaneously reproduced. In this example, the distribution of channels corresponds to the reproduction of sounds related to channels 0 to 11 = BGM from the sub-main control unit SM (hereinafter, may be referred to as music), warning sound effects, etc., 12 ~ 23 channels = Supports playback of sounds related to error notification sounds from the sub-main control unit SM, etc., and playback of sounds (sounds corresponding to animated moving images, etc.) from the sub-sub control unit SS. ing.

Next, FIG. 6 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the game machine is turned on, the process of FIG. 3A is executed. That is, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, after the initial setting is performed (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button, and the reset button (RAM clear) of the power supply unit E. It is determined whether or not the button) has been operated, that is, whether or not the operation of intentionally clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed by the administrator of the game hall or the like. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all the RAM contents on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (transmitted at the relevant timing). Alternatively, at that timing, a command may be set and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1015. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1007, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the information indicating that the power is normally turned off is not stored in the RAM. In the case of Yes in step 1007, in step 1008, the CPU MC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, it is stored in the checksum and the RAM area recorded at the time of power failure. Compare with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. To do. If Yes, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal in step 1010, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 (the RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1007, that is, information indicating that the power was normally turned off is stored in the RAM, or if No in step 1010, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, The CPU MC of the main control board M acquires various information commands stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M at the time of power failure, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are input to the sub-main control unit SM side. (It may be transmitted at the relevant timing, or a command may be set at the relevant timing and transmitted by the control command transmission process described later), and in step 1014-1, the main control The CPUMC of the board M sets the return of the solenoid {the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, the big winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20). In order to restore the open or closed state of the movable piece (for example, a member that allows or hinders entry into a specific area described later) to the state before the power is turned off, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d, a big prize It is determined whether or not the solenoid operation bit is on in the order of the mouth and the movable piece, and if it is on, it is determined that (the second main game start port / large winning opening / movable piece is open before the power is turned off). , In order to open it again), store the solenoid operation flag at the corresponding address}, and proceed to the process of step 1015. In step 1015, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores the information indicating that the power has been turned on normally in the RAM, and proceeds to the process of step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M is triggered by an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. 7B. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is T), {as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, FIG. 7B is executed}, and the process of step 1018 is performed. It shifts and performs various random update processing. After step 1018, the CPUMC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processes (for example, random number counter increment processes) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing performed by the main control board M. The CPU MC of the main control board M executes the process of FIG. 3B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the scheduled interrupt cycle T is reached (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the input process described later in step 1000-1. Next, in step 1000-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes various random number update processes described later. Next, in step 1000-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the initial value update type random number update process described later. Next, in step 1000-4, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the initial value random number update process described later. Next, in step 1000-5, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the timer subtraction process described later. Next, in step 1000-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a start port 2 valid period setting process (a process of setting the valid period of the second main game start port B10), which will be described later. Next, in step 1000-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the winning monitoring process described later. Next, in step 3000, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the prize ball payout command transmission control process described later. When a game ball wins in each winning opening, the number of winning balls paid out is 4 for the 1st main game starting port A10, 1 for the 2nd main game starting port B10, 1 ball for the 1st major winning opening C10, and 2nd. The large winning opening C20 has 15 balls, the left general winning opening (sometimes also called the general winning opening) P10 has 3 balls, and the right general winning opening P20 has 2 balls. The number of prize balls paid out is an example, and the number of prize balls paid out is the same when the ball is entered into the first main game start port A10 and when the ball is entered into the second main game start port B10. The number of prize balls paid out may be different between the case where the ball is entered in the first prize opening C10 and the case where the ball is entered in the second prize opening C20. When a game ball enters the left general winning opening P10, a lottery such as a winning / losing lottery is not executed, and a predetermined number of prize balls paid out (3 balls in this example) is given to the player. It is configured. In addition, when a game ball enters the right general winning opening P20, a random number on the auxiliary game side is acquired and a predetermined number of prize balls paid out (2 balls in this example) is given to the player. It is configured. However, the number of prize balls of all the winning openings provided in the pachinko game machine according to this example does not exceed 15 for one winning (winning ball), and is constant (abnormal) regardless of the gaming state. (Except when it is invalidated due to circumstances or an error is occurring), and it is configured so that prize balls are not paid out except for winning, while realizing various gaming states. , The result of the direct game is summarized in "whether or not the launched game ball wins a predetermined winning opening".

In this example, since the specific prize ball payout control process is performed not by the main control board M but by the prize ball payout control board KH, the main control board M manages the progress of the payout control in real time. It is difficult to do so, and if there is an obstacle due to a sudden matter such as a power outage during the payout for winning one game ball, it may not be possible to obtain an accurate number of prize balls. Therefore, in this example, the retry function at the time of abnormality in which the game ball is paid out again for the prize (for example, when the game ball wins the first main game start port A10 and one game ball is paid out). It has a function of executing the payout of the remaining three game balls after the power is turned off and then the power is restored. Of course, by adding a backup function to the prize ball payout control board KH, it is possible to realize an accurate number of prize ball payouts even when such an abnormality occurs. In this case, retry at the time of abnormality is possible. It is not necessary to provide a function.

Next, in step 2000, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the ball entry detection process described later. Next, in step 1100, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the electric accessory drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the special game control process described later. Next, in step 1601, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the large winning opening validity period setting process described later. Next, in step 1550, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1550-1, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the abnormality detection process described later. Next, in step 1550-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process described later. Next, in step 1550-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the game state display process described later. Next, in step 1550-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the handle state signal inspection process described later. Next, in step 1550-5, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the out port monitoring process described later. Next, in step 1550-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the LED output process described later. Next, in step 1900, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the fraud detection information management process described later. Next, in step 1950, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the error management process described later. Next, in step 1550-7, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the emission control signal output process described later. Next, in step 1550-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the test signal output process described later. Next, in step 1550-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the solenoid output process described later. Next, in step 1999, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each of the above processes to the sub-main control unit side). Next, in step 3500, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the external signal output process described later. Next, in step 1550-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M is set to allow the generation of the timer interrupt, and returns to the process executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process.

The input process is a process of determining a signal input to the main control board M from an input device such as a sensor and setting a flag or the like corresponding to the signal. In this example, the input process is attached to the game board surface. Switches (for example, the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s, the second main game start opening ball entry detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start opening entry ball detection device H11s, the first major winning opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd big winning opening winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device, etc.), out ball count switch that detects entry into the out port D36, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, opening signal (for example, front frame D14, door D18) Etc.), magnetic detection signal 1 (for example, detection signal by magnetic detection sensor 1), radio wave detection signal, impact detection signal, touch state signal and magnetic detection signal 2 (for example, detection signal by magnetic detection sensor 2) are monitored. It is a process to do. In this example, for a special input such as a RAM clear switch, input determination or the like is performed by a process different from the input process.

Note that the various random number update processes are processes in which the random numbers used in the lottery, which has an extremely low effect on the payout, are updated relatively simply (for example, a constant is added). In this example, the normal symbol variation pattern random numbers are used. (For example, the auxiliary game symbol variation mode random number) and the variation pattern random number (for example, the variation mode lottery random number) are updated.

The initial value update type random number update process is a process for updating a random number used in a lottery that affects the number of balls to a certain extent (a process different from the above-mentioned various random number update processes), and in this example, it is a process. , Ordinary symbol per random number (for example, auxiliary game symbol winning random number), normal symbol symbol random number (for example, auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random number), special symbol symbol random number (for example, symbol lottery random number), soft random number per special symbol described later, etc. It is a process for updating.

The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the random number for determining the initial value of the random number updated by the initial value update type random number update process used in the lottery in which the above-mentioned influence on the ball output occurs to some extent. As an example of the random number to be updated in this example, an initial value random number per ordinary symbol, an initial value random number of the ordinary symbol symbol, an initial value random number of the special symbol symbol, a soft initial value random number per the special symbol, and the like can be exemplified. The initial value random number per normal symbol and the normal symbol symbol initial value random number are random numbers updated by the initial value random number update process when a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers are configured.

The timer subtraction process includes a 2-byte timer (for example, a timer MP11t-C for managing fluctuations in the first and second main game symbols, an electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B for the second main game start port, and a timer MP34t for special games. , Open time timer, etc.) is updated.

Further, the start port 2 validity period setting process is a winning opening that facilitates winning by operating the ordinary electric accessory depending on the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d). (For example, it is a process of setting the validity period of the second main game start port B10).

The winning monitoring process is a process of updating the pass counter of the switch, creating a security output request to be output to the external terminal board, and requesting the transmission of a command to be transmitted to the effect control board.

Further, the large winning opening valid period setting process is a process of saving the result of determining the valid period of the large winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20). When the specific area C22 is configured to be included in the large winning opening as in the third embodiment described later, the result of the valid period determination of the specific area C22 is saved by the large winning opening valid period setting process. You may.

The abnormality detection process is a process of monitoring magnetism, monitoring disconnection / short circuit / power supply, monitoring radio waves, monitoring the open / closed state of the glass frame set / game board D35, and monitoring the impact. ..

In addition, the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process is to detect the ball entry passage time abnormality when the game ball enters various entry ports (for example, the first main game start port A10), so that each switch level It is a process of monitoring the continuous on-time of the ball (continuous on-time of the ball entry sensor).

Further, the game status display process is displayed on the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated (the number of execution rounds in the jackpot), the error status, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the normal symbol display device (auxiliary game symbol display device H20). The current number of auxiliary game hold balls) and the number of operation hold balls of the special symbol display device (current number of main game hold balls displayed on the first main game symbol display device A20 or the second main game symbol display device B20). This is a process for making a display request.

Further, the handle state signal inspection process is a process of monitoring the touch state of the launch handle (for example, the launch handle D44).

Further, the out port monitoring process is a process of monitoring the out port (for example, the out port D36) in order to create a security output request.

Further, the LED output processing is a display on the special symbol display device (for example, a display of the first main game symbol on the first main game symbol display device A20, a display of the second main game symbol on the second main game symbol display device B20). , Display of the number of reserved balls on the first main game side in the first main game symbol display device A20, display of the number of reserved balls on the second main game side in the second main game symbol display device B20), normal symbol display device (Display of auxiliary symbols on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, display of the number of balls on hold for operation on the auxiliary game side in the auxiliary game symbol display device H20), error status display, game status display, and separate display (for example). , The situation where you should hit right, the situation where you should hit left) and the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously (display the number of rounds in the big hit), so the display is initialized. This is a process for sequentially controlling the LED output controlled on the main control board M side such as the output of display data.

Further, the launch control signal output process is a process of outputting a signal for prohibiting or permitting the launch of the game ball, and the details will be described later.

Further, the test signal output process is a process of creating a signal to be output to a test device outside the game machine and outputting it to a corresponding output port.

Further, the solenoid output processing is a solenoid of an ordinary electric accessory (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) and a large winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) solenoid. This is a process for outputting output data. It should be noted that, as in the third embodiment described later, a specific region C22 is provided in the large winning opening, and a shielding member (upper shielding member C24, lower shielding member C25) that makes it difficult or easy to enter the specific region C22 is provided. When configured, the output data of the movable single solenoid is output by the solenoid output process.

Next, FIG. 8 is a main flowchart showing the flow of NMI interrupt processing (at the time of power interruption) performed by the main control board M. First, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing shown in FIG. Is executed. That is, when the power of the game machine is turned off (in this example, when the NMI is interrupted), in step 1019-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer is interrupted. In the case of Yes in step 1019-1, in step 1019-2, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the information indicating that the power has been turned on normally is not stored in the RAM. On the other hand, if No in step 1019-1, the process of step 1019-1 is performed again. In the case of Yes in step 1019-2, in step 1019-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M saves the information indicating that the power is cut off abnormally in the RAM, and proceeds to the next step 1022. On the other hand, if No in step 1019-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores in the RAM information indicating that the power is normally cut off in step 1019-4, and in step 1020, of the main control board M. The CPUMC sets the power failure information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the CPUMC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power cutoff waiting loop processing. Although an example of executing the power interruption process (FIG. 8) by inputting the power interruption signal to the NMI terminal of the CPU has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the power interruption signal is input to a specific input port. It may be set and the power failure may be determined and the power failure process may be performed by monitoring a specific input port in the main control board side main process (FIG. 6) or the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7).

Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout command transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3000 in FIG. 7. First, in step 3100, the main control board M executes the payout control board transmission control process described later. Next, in step 3200, the main control board M executes the payout control board reception control process described later, and shifts to the next process (process in step 2000).

Next, FIG. 10 shows a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. First, in step 3105, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout signal is OFF, that is, whether or not the payout is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3105, in step 3110, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has an unpaid prize ball (a prize ball for which the prize ball payout command has not yet been transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH side). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3115, the CPUMC of the main control board M is an error that is inappropriate for paying out the prize ball (for example, an error related to the failure of the payout motor, the upper plate is full). , Ball out error, etc.) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3115, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a prize ball payout command for the number of prize ball payouts corresponding to the unpaid prize ball information in the order in which the payout process is executed this time (see FIG. 11). ) Is set. Then, in step 3125, the CPUMC of the main control board M deletes the unpaid prize ball information corresponding to the prize ball payout command set this time, and executes a process of shifting the subsequent information. Next, in step 3130, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits the set prize ball payout command to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and shifts to the next process (counter payout control board reception control process in step 3200). To do. In addition, even if No in step 3105, step 3110 and step 3115, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3200).

<< Contents of commands and information sent and received between the main control board / payout control board >>
Here, the contents of commands and information transmitted and received between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the command from the main control board M to the prize ball payout control board KH according to the present embodiment includes specific information indicating that the command is a prize ball payout command and information on the number of prize balls. Specifically, bits 7 to 4 are fixed at 1001 (identification information that the command is a prize ball payout command). Next, bits 3 to 0 relate to the number of prize balls, for example, 0 (0000) means that there are 0 prize balls, and 15 (1111) means that there are 15 prize balls. ..

Next, the payout-related information transmitted from the prize ball payout control board KH to the main control board M side will be described. Here, as an example, the payout-related information (prize ball payout-related information or payout abnormality-related information) includes a fixed value (start bit), payout motor operation error information, excessive payout error information, ball path error information, and payout motor error information. , Prize ball device error information, saucer full tank error, and prize ball payout completion information. Here, the details of each error content will be described later, but if the bit corresponding to each error is "0", it means that the error has not occurred, and if it is "1", the error Means that is occurring. Note that bit 0 is related to the completion of the prize ball payout, "0" means that the prize ball payout is completed, and "1" means that the prize ball payout is not completed.

Next, FIG. 12 shows a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process according to the subroutine of step 3200 of FIG. First, in step 3205, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout-related information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 3205, in step 3210, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not error information (ball out error, upper plate full tank error, other payout related error) exists in the received payout related information. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 3210, in step 3215, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the error flag related to the corresponding error to send the error information on the prize ball payout control board KH side to the main control board M side. But manage (centralized management). On the other hand, if No in step 3210, in step 3220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the error flag related to the error on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Then, in step 3225, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion information exists in the received payout-related information. In the case of Yes in step 3225, in step 3230, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the set prize ball payout command (prize ball payout command related to the completion of this payout), and the next process (step 2000). Process). Even if No in step 3205 and step 3225, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2000).

Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2000 in FIG. First, in step 2100, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2200, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the main game start port entry ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2300, the ball entry determination means executes the first (second) large winning opening ball entry detection process described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the general winning opening ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2500, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the discharge ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the out-port / in-ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the prize ball determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device H11s for the ball entry detection time (the time or more, the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s). When the input is detected, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10). If Yes in step 2104, in step 2106, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game start flag. Next, in step 2108, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200). On the other hand, if No in step 2102, in step 2110, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s for the detection end time (the time or more, the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device). When the H11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than (the time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the auxiliary game start port entry detection device H11s). In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2112, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200). Even if No in step 2104 or step 2110, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2200).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main game start opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the first main game start port entry detection device A11s for the entry detection time (the time or more, the first main game start opening entry). When the ball detection device A11s detects the input, it is determined whether or not the ball detection device A11s is ON for more than the time (time for determining that the ball has entered the first main game start port A10). In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start flag. Next, in step 2210, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2211, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the start port entry number counter MJ12c, and proceeds to step 2216.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2202, in step 2212, the CPUMC of the main control board M inputs the input from the ball entry counter MJ10c for the detection time (the first main game start port entry detection device A11s inputs for that time or longer). If is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the first main game start port input ball detection device A11s). Next, in step 2214, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first main game start port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2215, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the long-time detection flag of the first main game start port, and proceeds to step 2216. In addition, even if No in step 2204 and step 2212, the process proceeds to step 2216.

Next, in step 2216, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start port confirmation sensor has detected the game ball. In the case of Yes in step 2216, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the value of the first main game start opening confirmation counter in step 2218, and proceeds to step 2222. Even if No in step 2216, the process proceeds to step 2222.

Next, in step 2222, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2222, in step 2224, the second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B receives the input from the second main game start opening ball entry detection device B11s as the ball entry detection time (more than that time, When the second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not the second main game start port B10 is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the second main game start port B10). In the case of Yes in step 2224, in step 2225, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag is on during the valid period of the second main game start port. If Yes in step 2225, in step 2226, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second main game start flag. Next, in step 2228, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the number of incoming balls counter value. Next, in step 2230, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second main game start port detection continuation flag, and proceeds to step 2240.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2225 (when the entry of the game ball is detected during the period when the entry into the second main game start port B10 is not valid), the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first in step 2231. 2 It is determined that there is an illegal entry in the main game start port B10, an illegal entry command for the second main game start port (command to the sub control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2240. In addition, even if No in step 2224, the process proceeds to step 2240.

On the other hand, if No in step 2222, in step 2232, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the second main game start port entry detection device B11s for the detection time (the time or more, the second main game start port entry). When the ball detection device B11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than (the time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s). In the case of Yes in step 2232, in step 2234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second main game start port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2238, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the second main game start port long-time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2240. In addition, even if No in step 2232, the process proceeds to step 2240.

Next, in step 2240, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the illegal detection time (detected as a normal ball entry) by the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s (second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s). It is a time that exceeds the time to be performed, and it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time for determining that fraud is being performed. In the case of Yes in step 2240, in step 2242, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) main game start port long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, even if No in step 2240, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the first (second) grand prize opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the first winning opening winning detection device C11s (second winning opening winning detection device C21s) for the winning ball detection time (the time). As described above, when the ball entry detection device detects the input, it is determined whether or not the ball is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the ball entry port). In the case of Yes in step 2304, in step 2305, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag is on during the valid period of the first (second) grand prize opening. In the case of Yes in step 2305, in step 2306, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) grand prize opening ball entry flag. Next, in step 2308, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the number of incoming balls counter value. Next, in step 2310, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) winning opening detection continuation flag, and proceeds to step 2320.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2305 (when the entry of the game ball is detected during the period when the entry into the large winning opening is not valid), the CPUMC of the main control board M is invalid in the large winning opening in step 2311. It is determined that there was a good ball entry, the first (second) large winning opening illegal entry command (command to the sub control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2320. Even if No in step 2304, the process proceeds to step 2320.

On the other hand, if No in step 2302, in step 2312, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the first winning opening winning detection device C11s (second winning opening winning detection device C21s) for the detection time {the time. As described above, when the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s) does not detect the input, the game ball is the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second large winning opening winning detection device C11s). It is determined whether or not it is OFF for a time} or more when it is considered that the passage of the detection device C21s) has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 2312, in step 2314, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2318, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) grand prize opening long-time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2320. On the other hand, if No in step 2312, the process proceeds to step 2320.

Next, in step 2320, in the CPUMC of the main control board M, the input from the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s (second large winning opening winning detection device C21s) is the illegal detection time {the time or more, the first large When the winning opening winning detection device C11s (second major winning opening winning detection device C21s) detects an input, the time for considering that an illegal entry into the first winning opening C10 (second major winning opening C20) is detected. } Determine whether or not it is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) large winning opening long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). On the other hand, even if No in step 2320, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the general winning opening ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. In addition, the general winning opening P10 (the left general winning opening P10 and the right general winning opening P20 may be collectively referred to as the general winning opening P10) pays out the winning ball when the game ball enters. , The general winning opening ball entry detection device P11s (in the present embodiment), which is a ball entry port that does not affect the progress of the game (does not execute a lottery that affects the progress of the game) and is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball. Is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the left general winning opening P10, a general winning opening entry detection device P11s, and a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the right general winning opening P20. It has two general winning opening ball entry detection devices P11s with the entry ball detection device P11s).

First, in step 2402, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the general winning opening ball detection device for the entry detection time (the general winning opening ball detection device detects the input for that time or longer). Then, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the general winning opening). If Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening entry flag. Next, in step 2408, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the number of incoming balls counter value. Next, in step 2410, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening detection continuation flag, and proceeds to step 2420. On the other hand, if No in step 2402, in step 2412, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the general winning opening ball detection device for the ball entry detection time (the time or more, the general winning opening ball detecting device inputs. If is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the general winning opening ball entry detection device). In the case of Yes in step 2412, in step 2414, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2418, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening long-time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2420. In addition, even if No in step 2404 and step 2412, the process proceeds to step 2420.

Next, in step 2420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the general winning opening ball detection device is an illegal detection time {when the general winning opening ball detecting device detects the input for that time or longer, the general winning opening is won. It is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the mouth is detected. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500). Even if No in step 2420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2500).

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the emission confirmation detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the total emission when the input from the total emission confirmation sensor C90s is the input ball detection time (when the total emission confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for that time or longer). It is determined whether or not the sensor C90s is ON for more than the time it is considered that the ball has entered. If Yes in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the emission confirmation detection continuation flag in step 2506. Next, in step 2508, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the total emission confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and proceeds to step 2520.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2510, the CPUMC of the main control board M did not detect the input from the total emission confirmation sensor C90s during the detection end time (the total emission confirmation sensor C90s did not detect the input for that time or longer). In this case, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s). If Yes in step 2510, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the emission confirmation detection continuation flag in step 2512. Next, in step 2514, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the emission confirmation long-time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2520. Even if No in step 2504 or step 2510, the process proceeds to step 2520.

Next, in step 2520, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the input from the total emission confirmation sensor C90s is ON for the fraud detection time or longer. In the case of Yes in step 2520, in step 2522, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the emission confirmation long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). On the other hand, even if No in step 2520, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2600).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the out-port / in-ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the out port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, in the CPUMC of the main control board M, the input from the out-port in-ball detection device C80s is the input detection time (the out-port in-ball detection device C80s detects the input for the time or more). Then, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the out port C80). In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the out port detection continuation flag, and in step 2608, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the ball entry counter value ( (Increment), and the process proceeds to step 2620.

On the other hand, if No in step 2602, in step 2610, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the out-port in-ball detection device C80s for the detection end time (the out-port in-ball detection device C80s inputs the input for that time or longer). If it is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the out-mouth / in-ball detection device C80s). In the case of Yes in step 2610, in step 2612, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the out port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2615, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the out port long-time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, even if No in step 2604 or step 2610, the process proceeds to step 2620.

Next, in step 2620, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the out-port entry ball detection device C80s is an illegal detection time (when the out-port entry ball detection device C80s detects the input for that time or longer). , It is determined whether or not the ball is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the out port C80 has been performed). In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the out port long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2700). On the other hand, even if No in step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2700).

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, in step 2702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the number of prize balls paid out (4 in this example) related to the first main game start port A10. to add. Next, in step 2708, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out) to pay out the prize balls related to the first main game start port A10, and steps 2712. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2702, the process proceeds to step 2712.

Next, in step 2712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball counter MHc to the number of prize balls paid out (1 in this example) related to the second main game start port B10. to add. Next, in step 2718, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out) to pay out the prize balls related to the second main game start port B10, and steps 2722. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2712, the process proceeds to step 2722.

Next, in step 2722, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) grand prize opening entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2722, in step 2723, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) grand prize opening entry flag. Next, in step 2724, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the counter value of the prize ball counter MHc as the number of prize balls paid out related to the first prize opening C10 (second prize opening C20) (15 in this example). ) Is added. Next, in step 2728, the CPUMC of the main control board M pays out the prize balls related to the first prize opening C10 (second prize opening C20) (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out). Is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2732. On the other hand, if No in step 2722, the process proceeds to step 2732.

Next, in step 2732, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2732, in step 2733, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening entry flag. Next, in step 2734, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the number of prize balls paid out related to the general winning opening (in this example, the left general winning opening: 3, the right general winning opening). : 2) is added. Next, in step 2738, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information to the effect that the prize balls to be paid out related to the general winning opening (for example, information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out), and next processing (step 1100). Process). On the other hand, even if No in step 2732, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1100).

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 7. First, in step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered (inflow, in the case of a gate, passed) into the auxiliary game start port H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits an auxiliary game start port entry command, which is a command relating to the fact that the ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10, to the sub-main control unit SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1110. On the other hand, if No in step 1102, in step 1104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball has entered the right general winning opening P20. In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits the right general winning opening ball entry command, which is a command relating to the fact that the ball has entered the right general winning opening P20, to the sub-main control unit SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1110. Even if No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1110, in step 1112, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, the auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1114, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the hold ball in the form of being set in the RAM area of the main control board M together with the information on the number of hold, and the next process ( The process proceeds to step 1200). In addition, even if No in step 1104 and step 1110, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). Here, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that a random number on the auxiliary game side can be acquired when the ball enters the auxiliary game start opening H10 or the right general winning opening P20. Further, since the auxiliary game start port H10 has the shape of a gate, the game ball that has entered the auxiliary game start port H10 (passes through the auxiliary game start port H10) will continue to flow down the game board surface, and the auxiliary game start. While it is possible to enter a ball entering a ball opening (right general winning opening P20, etc.) downstream of the opening H10, a game ball entering the right general winning opening P20 flows down to the back of the game board surface, and thereafter other It is configured not to enter the ball entrance. Although the details will be described later, even if the game ball enters the auxiliary game start port H10 (the game ball passes through the auxiliary game start port H10), the prize ball is not paid out, but the right general prize opening P20 It is configured so that the prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters the ball.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric accessory opening flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a reserved ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the game state on the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag) and sets the lottery table MN41ta-H for determining the auxiliary game symbol. With reference to the acquired auxiliary game side, the stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol winning random number based on the reserved ball (for example, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, it is compared with the case where it is off. Then, the winning symbol is selected with high probability) and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the CPUMC of the main control board M.

Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, the stop symbols are "D0, D1, D2", and the stop symbols that are the hit symbols are "D1, D2", which are caused by the fact that each of them has stopped. In the non-time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (opening for 0.2 seconds → closing), and the electric accessory is stopped. When the symbol is "D2", the opening mode is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.8 seconds → open for 2.0 seconds, closed) (longest open). Further, in the time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 1 second → closed) and stopped. When the symbol is "D2", the opening mode is configured to be (open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.8 seconds → open for 4.0 seconds → closed). It should be noted that the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0" during the non-time reduction game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a hit symbol "D1" during the time reduction game.

Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the auxiliary game symbol variation time to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H based on the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). (For example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol, updates the holding information recorded in the RAM area of the CPUMC of the main control board M, and assists. After starting the game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, the auxiliary game symbol variation display is started on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H and determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol and confirms and displays the acquired stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. To do. Then, in step 1228, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag. Next, in step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is a “hit” (D1 and D2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens for 1 second → closes for 1 second in the opening mode (for example, in the case of the hit symbol “D1”, based on the hit symbol on the auxiliary game side. → Open for 1 second → Closed for 1 second → Open for 1 second → Closed, in the case of the hit symbol “D2”, open for 0.2 seconds, closed for 0.8 seconds, open for 5 seconds,) Is determined, and a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening / closing time) of the electric accessory is set in the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B. Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric accessory opening flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and proceeds to step 1242. Even if No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242. In this embodiment, when the main game time reduction flag is off and the auxiliary game stop symbol is a predetermined hit symbol (D2), the time for continuing to open the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is the longest. Has been done.

Next, in step 1242, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has reached a predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory with reference to the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game start port electric accessory B11d, turns off the electric accessory opening flag, and performs the next process. (Processing in step 1300).

If No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and if No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230 and step 1242, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process immediately proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, the process may be configured to move to the next process after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing branch processing using the stop display fixed flag and timer. Achievable). In addition, there may be a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers, and an auxiliary game symbol winning random number for determining the success or failure of the auxiliary game, an auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random number for determining the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and an auxiliary game symbol. Auxiliary game symbol variation mode random numbers and the like for determining the fluctuation time of the above may be provided.

Although not shown, in the one-time opening operation of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d (opening operation based on the stop of the symbol per auxiliary game), the game is played at the second main game start port B10. Even when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) are entered, the opening operation of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is terminated, that is, the time reduction game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag on). ), If the opening (longest opening) of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d based on the auxiliary game stop symbol "D2" is executed, "open for 0.2 seconds → close for 0.8 seconds → The opening time of "open → closed for 4 seconds" ends, or during the opening period of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d, the predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls are placed in the second main game start port B10. The opening (opening period) of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is configured to be completed by the achievement of the earlier of the two cases. In addition, when the second main game start port electric accessory B11d based on the auxiliary game stop symbol "D2" is opened (maximum open) in the non-time reduction game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag off), " The opening time of "opening for 0.2 seconds-> closing for 0.8 seconds-> opening for 2.0 seconds-> closing" ends, or during the opening period of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d, the predetermined number (for example, The opening (opening period) of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is configured to be completed by achieving the earlier of the cases where the game ball (10 balls) enters the second main game starting port B10. ing. In addition, the total time during which the normal electric accessory is open at the maximum opening time (when the auxiliary game stop symbol is "D2") in the time-reduced game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag on) is 4.2 seconds, which is non-existent. The total time during which the normal electric accessory is open at the maximum opening time (when the auxiliary game stop symbol is "D2") in the time reduction game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag off) is 2.2 seconds, and any game Even in the state, it is configured so that the maximum opening time of one time does not exceed 6 seconds, and each game state (time shortening game state) so that the maximum number of winnings during operation does not exceed approximately 10. (Whether it is a non-time reduction game state).

Further, in this example, as soon as the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the operation of the ordinary electric accessory (second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is confirmed and displayed in the winning mode (for example, It is configured to operate (within 500 ms, which is shorter than the shortest symbol fluctuation time in the game machine), and it is possible to clearly correspond to which trigger the ordinary electric accessory is operating. In addition, in order to prevent a large number of game balls from winning during the closing operation (during the operation of opening → closing) of the ordinary electric accessory (second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the ordinary electric accessory The drive source (solenoid) is selected so that the object (second main game start port electric accessory B11d) returns to the inactive state in a short time, and the game ball wins more than necessary and the ball is ejected. It is designed so that it does not differ significantly from the design.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 7. First, in step 1302, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the first main game start port entry information from the first main game start port entry detection device A11s of the first main game start port A10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1303, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues the first main game start port entry command, which is a command relating to entering the first main game start port A10, to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1304. Next, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the main game (particularly the first main game side) is within the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning / failing lottery random number for determining the winning / failing, a symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of the variable mode lottery random numbers for the purpose are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are acquired in series at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random numbers in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPU MC of the main control board M sends information (hold generation command) to the effect that the first main game random number has been acquired to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (hold generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

The winning / failing lottery random number may be composed of one random number or may be a random number generated by two or more random numbers. Random numbers generated by two or more random numbers include a CPU built-in random number that is updated based on the CPU clock or an external clock, and a soft random number per special symbol (main game symbol) that is updated by timer interrupt processing. You may use the result of the calculation (for example, addition) of.

Next, in step 1312, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game start port entry information from the second main game start port entry detection device B11s of the second main game start port B10. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls for the main game (particularly the second main game side) is within the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of a winning / failing lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the case of the first main game side. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number on the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number on the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the winning / failing lottery random number for the first main game and the winning / failing lottery random number for the second main game). Are set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random numbers in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPU MC of the main control board M sends information (hold generation command) to the effect that the second main game random number has been acquired to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (hold generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). If No in steps 1302 and 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312, and if No in steps 1312 and 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400).

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the RAM area of the main control board M and confirms whether or not there is a hold of the second main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). On the other hand, if No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the second main game symbol exists, regardless of the existence of the reserved ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the reserved ball of the first main game symbol). It is configured to prioritize the hold digestion of the second main game symbol (even if it comes first), but it is not limited to this (hold digestion based on the winning order and both main game symbols are performed in parallel at the same time). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery to draw a lottery).

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) related to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 24. Since this processing is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is a condition that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation), the main game symbol is not changing, and the main game symbol is held. Although not shown in this example, when a variable fixed time (time for stopping and displaying the confirmed display symbol after the final display of the main game symbol) is provided, the fluctuation start condition of the next fluctuation is set during the fixed variable time. May be configured so as not to satisfy.

In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the CPUMC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the first main game content determination random number related to the current symbol variation ( The second main game content determination random number) is read, deleted from the RAM area of the main control board M, and the remaining temporarily stored hold information is shifted (hold digestion process). Next, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 1 corresponding to each game state, and refers to the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, Based on the winning lottery random number), the main game symbol winning / losing lottery is executed.

Here, FIG. 26 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game winning / failing lottery table (second main game winning / failing lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability-variable gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability-variable gaming state. The winning probability is just an example, and is not limited to this.

Next, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table), and the main game symbol winning / failing result and the first A stop symbol related to the main game symbol is determined based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number), and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

Here, FIG. 26 (main game symbol 2) is an example of the first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A / 5A / 7A" and "4B / 5B / 7B"). It is configured so that one main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of special game rounds determined with reference to the main game symbol is 4 rounds for 4A, 4B, 5A, 5B, and 10 rounds for 7A, 7B. The random value and the type of the stop symbol are also examples, and are not limited to this. {For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. May}.

Next, in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table) corresponding to each game state, and refers to the main game symbol. The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the winning / failing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number), and these are determined in the RAM area of the main control board M. It is temporarily stored in and the process proceeds to step 1414.

Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 26 is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table). As shown in this figure, in the present embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol with respect to a certain random number value can be determined based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the main game symbol and the state of the main game time reduction flag. Has been done. For example, when the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit for a certain random number value, it is easy to determine the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively long, and the main game time reduction flag is on (time reduction). In the game state), the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short is easily determined. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of variation mode (variation time), selectivity, and the like. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time reduction game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {symbol variation on the second main game side. When is configured to be advantageous to the player, it is easy for the second main game side to hold the game by lowering the symbol fluctuation efficiency of the first main game side (advantageous to the player). Since the purpose is to build a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be separated}.

Next, in step 1414, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives commands (stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol, variation mode information, etc.) related to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. The command related to the current game state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Will be sent to). Next, in step 1415, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timers MP11t-C. Next, in step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On B21g), the variation display of the main game symbol is started according to the variation mode stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1417, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag and proceeds to step 1420.

On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1419, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M is for command transmission for transmitting information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation is completed to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variation display of the main game symbol on B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbol stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is displayed and controlled as a fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag.

Next, in step 1430, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the RAM area of the main control board M, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1440, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, the process proceeds to step 1500.

Next, in step 1500, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 25. First, in step 1506, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1510, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1514, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1514, in step 1516, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time reduction flag. Next, in step 1518, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time reduction flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). In addition, even if No in step 1506, step 1510 or step 1514, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). As described above, in this example, the remaining time reduction number (the remaining symbol variation number in which the time shortening game state ends depending on the symbol variation end number after the end of the special game) is transmitted to the sub-control board S. Has been done.

Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604 and step 1606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1607, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) in the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1608, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is started to the sub-main control unit side. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

On the other hand, if No in step 1602, in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, in the case of Yes in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 1612. If No in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the permission for the special game has not been granted, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1601).

Next, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether or not it is just before the start of each round. In the case of Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, the set opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that keeps opening, a pattern that opens and closes a plurality of times) is set in step 1614. Next, in step 1616, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1620, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d) of the first large winning opening C10 to make the first large winning opening. The winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) is opened, the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the big winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processes of steps 1614 to 1620.

Next, in step 1622, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning games, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. The command transmission buffer MT10 is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, a predetermined number (for example, the second winning opening C20) is inserted into the first winning opening C10 (or the second winning opening C20). It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball (10 balls). If Yes in step 1624, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, if No in step 1624, in step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) and determines the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the opening of the large winning opening. ) Has passed or not. In the case of Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. If No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1601).

Next, in step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d of the second large winning opening C20). 1st big winning opening C10 (or 2nd big winning opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU MC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (particularly the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1633, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1634, it is determined whether or not the final round has ended (for example, whether or not the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1638, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends information to the effect that the special game is ended (special game end display instruction command) to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999). Then, in step 1650, the game state determination process after the end of the special game described later is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1601). Even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1601).

In this example, the maximum number of winnings of the game balls set on the program in one unit game (execution of one round) is set as 10, and when the maximum number of winnings is reached. Controls to close the big winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) immediately, and prevents the winning of the game ball exceeding the maximum number of winnings, while the ball is squeezed (large). Even if the maximum number of winnings is exceeded due to unforeseen circumstances such as the game ball temporarily stopping between the door and the game board during the closing operation of the winning opening, the specified conditions (within the specified period after closing) Only in the case, the prizes exceeding the maximum number of prizes are treated as valid prizes.

More specifically, when the first big winning opening C10 is opened in the first round of the big hit, and when a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) is won in the first big winning opening C10 in the first round, the first The first round will be completed, but in the situation where 9 game balls have entered the 1st prize opening C10 in the 1st round, the 10th ball and 11 will enter the 1st prize opening C10. Even if the number of game balls exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) at which the first round ends due to the occurrence of the balls entering the ball substantially at the same time enters the first large winning opening C10. It is configured to pay out the prize balls with the winning as valid. On the other hand, the drive mechanism (solenoid and drive transmission mechanism) and the opening / closing part (door, etc.) of the large winning opening are closed and the large winning opening is executed in real time so as to prevent excessive winning (winning exceeding the maximum number of winnings). Is closed, and structural design and electrical design are made so that a plurality of game balls do not stay in the opening / closing member or its vicinity immediately before the closing operation. As a result, it is configured so as not to be disadvantageous to the player while suppressing the game performance from being different from the ball ejection design value.

In addition, the maximum opening time set as a program in one unit game (execution of one round) is set to be 30 seconds or less throughout one unit game, and is large before the maximum opening time elapses. When the number of winning game balls to the winning opening reaches the maximum number of winnings, the large winning opening is controlled to be closed immediately, and after the maximum opening time elapses, the winning of the game ball is blocked, while the ball Even if a prize is won after the maximum opening time has elapsed due to an unforeseen situation such as (the game ball temporarily stops between the door and the game board during the closing operation of the large winning opening), the specified conditions (after closing) Only within a predetermined period), the prize is treated as a valid prize.

More specifically, as an opening mode of the big winning opening when executing one round in the big hit, "15 seconds open → 2 seconds closed → depending on the type of big hit and the number of unit games (number of execution rounds) One of multiple operation patterns such as "14.5 seconds open → close", "29.5 seconds open → close", etc. is set, but the big prize opening is set regardless of the operation pattern. It is configured so that the total opening time is 30 seconds or less, the maximum opening time (29.5 seconds) of the big winning opening has passed in one round, and the game ball is being closed during the closing process of the big winning opening. Even if the ball is entered, the prize ball is paid out with the winning valid within the valid period (about 1000 ms after the closing process of the large winning opening). On the other hand, the drive mechanism (solenoid and drive transmission mechanism) and the opening / closing part (door, etc.) of the large winning opening are closed by executing the closing process and closing the large winning opening in real time so as to suppress the winning after the lapse of the maximum opening time. However, structural design and electrical design are made so that a plurality of game balls do not stay in or near the opening / closing member immediately before the closing operation. As a result, it is configured so as not to be disadvantageous to the player while suppressing the game performance from being different from the ball ejection design value.

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which relates to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. 28. First, in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a probabilistic jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that shifts to a probability variation game state after the end of the special game, and in this example, " 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B ") is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag and proceeds to step 1656. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1652 (in this example, the non-probability variable jackpot symbol, which is the jackpot symbol that shifts to the non-probability variable gaming state after the end of the special game, is the stop symbol, and in this example, "4A". (In the case of "4B"), the process proceeds to step 1656. Next, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the time reduction number counter MP52c to the time reduction number according to the game state and the stop symbol. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time reduction flag. Next, in step 1660, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 1601).

Further, in this example, the electric support game state (time for opening the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory, time until opening, the number of times of opening, etc., and the ordinary electric accessory are activated only based on the end of the big hit. It is a state in which the probability that the combination of symbols to be displayed is displayed is changed so as to facilitate winning, and it may be referred to as a time-shortened game state or an auxiliary game time-shortened game state). As for the state, the main game symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times and 6 times) determined by the game state and the stop symbol, except during the probability fluctuation of the special symbol (in the case of the probability fluctuation game state). It is limited to (until the change of the main game symbol of the predetermined time is completed). Furthermore, the number of game balls acquired in combination with the winning of other winning openings is approximately the same as the number of fired game balls (the ball output rate does not exceed 1) or less. The ball ejection performance in the state (the arrangement of each winning opening, the operation content of the ordinary electric accessory, the hit probability of the auxiliary game symbol, etc. are designed), and the ball ejection performance in the electric support game state is the jackpot ejection performance. It is designed not to be higher than. With this configuration, the game related to the main game symbol and the game related to the auxiliary game symbol become a master-slave relationship in the game, and the game is not complicated more than necessary.

Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 7. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game time saving flag, auxiliary game time saving flag). Next, in step 1558, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1560, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game transition permission flag. Next, in step 1562, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550-1). In addition, even if No in step 1552, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550-1).

Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal radio wave sensor is ON continuously a predetermined number of times (for example, the process is a timer interrupt process). It is a process executed in the above, and the purpose is to eliminate the influence of noise by determining whether or not the interrupts are turned on continuously in a predetermined number of interrupts. The same applies when the term "consecutively specified times" is used). In the case of Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that an illegal radio wave has been detected, turns on the illegal radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912. On the other hand, if No in step 1902, in step 1906, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal radio wave sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the detection of the illegal radio wave is completed, turns off the illegal radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912. Even if No in step 1906, the process proceeds to step 1912.

Next, in step 1912, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal magnetic sensor is ON continuously a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1912, in step 1914, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the illegal magnetism has been detected, turns on the illegal magnetism detection flag, and proceeds to step 1922. On the other hand, if No in step 1912, in step 1916, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal magnetic sensor is OFF continuously a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1916, in step 1918, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the detection of the illegal magnetism is completed, turns off the illegal magnetism detection flag, and proceeds to step 1922. Even if No in step 1916, the process proceeds to step 1922.

Next, in step 1922, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is ON continuously a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1922, in step 1924, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, turns on the door opening flag, and proceeds to step 1932. On the other hand, if No in step 1922, in step 1926, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1926, in step 1928, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, turns off the door opening flag, and proceeds to step 1932. In addition, even if No in step 1926, the process proceeds to step 1932.

Next, in step 1932, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is ON continuously a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1932, in step 1934, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the game machine frame D has been opened, turns on the frame opening flag, and proceeds to step 1950. On the other hand, if No in step 1932, in step 1936, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1936, in step 1938, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the game machine frame D has been opened, turns off the frame opening flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1950). .. Even if No in step 1936, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1950).

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the error management process according to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. First, in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the error occurrence condition is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the sub control board S side) relating to the fact that an error has occurred and the error type information (control command in step 1990). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the transmission process). Next, in step 1956, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the error release condition is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPU MC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the sub control board S side) related to the information that the error has been cleared (control command transmission process in step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550-7). In addition, even if No in step 1952 or step 1956, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550-7).

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the emission control signal output process according to the subroutine of step 1550-7 in FIG. First, in step 1550-7-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates a payout control board (sometimes referred to as a prize ball payout control board KH), a communication state (BIT0), and a disconnection short-circuit power supply error (BIT1). Get the error flag. When BIT0 indicating the communication state is "0000000000B", it indicates normality, and when it is "00000001B", it indicates an abnormality. In BIT1 indicating a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality, "0000000000B" indicates normality, and "00000010B" indicates an abnormality. Next, in step 1550-7-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M calculates the logical product of the error flag acquired in step 1550-7-1 and the determination data (“00000011B”). Next, in step 1550-7-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the emission permission signal bit data. For example, BIT5 of the output port indicates a launch permission signal, and if it is "00000000000B", it indicates an error (abnormality), and if it is "001000000B", it indicates normality. Next, in step 1550-7-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs to the output port and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550-8). Here, the output port is, for example, BIT0 is digit 1 bit data, BIT1 is digit 2 bit data, BIT2 is digit 3 bit data, BIT3 is digit 4 bit data, BIT4 is digit 5 bit data, and BIT5 is launch permission signal bit data. , BIT6 is configured as a production strobe bit data, and BIT7 is configured as a security bit.

Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. First, in step 3502, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the game state temporary storage means MB and confirms the state of the game machine. Next, in step 3504, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 and, based on the confirmed state of the game machine, transmits the external relay terminal plate G to the hall computer HC. A signal indicating the state of the game machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550-11).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output via the external relay terminal plate G according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the figure (image diagram of the signal output). The external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminals to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information on prize ball payout, information on winning or symbol stop, current game state (normal game state, Game state information output terminal for outputting information related to specific game state, special game state, etc., error information for outputting various error information detected by the open detection sensor when the door is open, etc. Output terminals, etc.} are provided. Then, as will be described later, the plurality of output terminals are connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness so that information can be output from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC. Here, in the present embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal for payout-related information which is information output from the prize ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are output terminals for signals output from the main control board M. For example, there are a plurality of jackpot output terminals that output a signal during a jackpot at the time of a jackpot. ), The door open output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door is open, the start port winning output terminal that outputs a signal when the start port is won, and the prize ball tank KT are short of balls. Output of game-related information, which is important information for the game hall operator, such as an output terminal when the ball runs out, which outputs an interim signal, and an output terminal for the number of times the special symbol is confirmed, which outputs a signal when the special symbol is confirmed and stopped. It is a terminal for. That is, by setting the output terminal of the payout-related information as one output terminal, it is possible to prevent the output terminal of these important game-related information from being exhausted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to transmit game-related information and payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. There is. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

Here, the outline of the information transmission method of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G, and the external relay terminal board The G and the hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is composed of a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, and the hall computer HC are always conductive. I'm not. That is, the electrical signal (a binary logic signal whose voltage is Hi level / Low level) input from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is the relay. After being temporarily replaced with a physical signal (a binary logic signal whose switch state is on / off), the signal is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal plate G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to the respective input / output terminals. Then, when the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the contact portion G2 is closed by the generated magnetic force, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are electrically connected. Further, when the relay coil G1 is degaussed, the contact portion G2 returns to the open state, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC do not conduct with each other. Therefore, on the hall computer HC side, by detecting the conduction period, it is possible to obtain a pulse signal substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal plate G. With such a configuration, one-way communication from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC can be physically secured, and the main control board M and the main control board M from the hall computer HC side can be secured. This is to prevent the goto act (so-called remote control goto) of illegally operating the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, a mechanism using a relay coil is configured to enable one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing a goto action, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pair of light emitting units A photosensor having a light receiving unit also enables one-way communication (for example, the light from the light emitting unit connected to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is received by the hall computer HC. It should be added that the signal can be received by reading by the unit.

However, since the configuration is such that the physical signal (switch state is on / off) is temporarily replaced, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are connected to the hall computer HC, so that the external relay terminal board G is one of the above. It is difficult to transmit complicated information using the input / output terminals, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input / output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for the number of times the special symbol is fixed). It is customary to configure so that only the information that "one change of the special symbol has been completed" can be transmitted).

Next, the control process executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 70. First, FIG. 35 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 3A is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after a reset such as when the power is turned on to the game machine. That is, when the power is turned on to the game machine, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-main control unit SM executes the initial processing based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear). When information is received → When the RAM on the sub side is initialized, when various information commands are received → The production-related information at the time of power failure is reset to the RAM on the sub side). Next, in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the volume level and the light amount level to the default values, and turns off the automatic button flag. The details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the volume level, the light amount level, and the automatic button operation setting (when the automatic button setting is turned on, the same effect as when the operation member is not operated is produced. (Executed) is configured to be set (changed) by the player, and when the power is set to "off → on", the previous settings (settings changed by the player and settings changed by the administrator) are concerned. It is configured to be set to the default value. The default values related to this example are the volume level is "volume switch large → 5, medium → 1, small → 4", the light amount level is "medium", and the automatic button operation setting is "off" (default). Setting a value is sometimes referred to as the default setting). Next, in step 2050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the management operation control process described later. When the volume is set to the default setting, the dB is "95" when the volume switch is large, "85" when the volume switch is in progress, and "82" when the volume switch is small. Even when the default setting is set, the relationship of "dB of large volume switch> dB in volume switch> dB of small volume switch" is maintained. In this embodiment, when the power is turned "off → on", the volume level, the light amount level, and the automatic button operation setting are set to the default settings, but the power is not limited to this, and the power is turned on. Depending on the off switch, the volume level, light intensity level, and automatic button operation setting will remain the same as before the power was turned off, and by executing RAM clear, the volume level, light intensity level, and automatic button operation setting will be set to the default settings. It may be configured to do so. After that, the process shifts to the loop processing in which the iterative processing routine (b) of the sub-main control unit SM is repeatedly executed. Here, when (b) is executed, first, in step 2150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the non-gaming period control process described later, as shown in the process of FIG. Next, in step 3600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the customized control process described later. Next, in step 3700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the music selection process described later. Next, in step 3800, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the hold information management process described later. Next, in step 3900, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 4000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2900, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 4400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the background image display process described later. Next, in step 4500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the illumination lamp operation control process described later. Next, in step 3250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the volume control process described later. Next, in step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the command set by these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and ends this iterative processing routine. To do.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a form in which the sub-main side routines (S2150 to S2999) are looped after the reset. Further, the process of FIG. 3C is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example). , NMI terminal) is the processing flow (c) when connected. That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2005, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S is a command input port from the main control board M side (described above). Check the input port of the data signal line. Then, in step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area on the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before the main interrupt process. Returns to the processing that was being executed in.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the management operation control process according to the subroutine of step 2050 in FIG. 35. First, in step 2052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the display condition of the management menu screen (in this example, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM clear button) is satisfied. The display condition of the management menu screen is not limited to the condition of this example, and if it is a condition that can be operated only by the administrator, there is no problem even if it is changed. For example, it cannot be operated unless the door D18 is opened. A switch may be provided and power-on may be used as a display condition on the management menu screen while pressing the switch and the RAM clear button, or power-on may be performed while pressing the sub input button SB and the RAM clear button on the management menu screen. It may be a display condition. Further, the management menu screen may be displayed when the sub input button SB is pressed while the door D18 is open. In such a configuration, the door D18 is closed. When the door D18 is open, the customization execution screen (menu screen that can be operated by the player) is displayed by pressing the sub input button SB, and when the door D18 is open, it is managed by pressing the sub input button SB. The menu screen (menu screen that can be operated by the administrator) will be displayed. When the sub input button SB is pressed, the sub control board S (sub side) determines whether to display the menu screen that can be operated by the player or the menu screen that can be operated by the administrator. (1) When the door D18 is in the open state, a door open command is transmitted to the sub side, and when the sub control board S detects the operation of the sub input button SB when the door open command is not received, the game is played. A menu screen that can be operated by a person is displayed, and when the operation of the sub input button SB is detected when the door opening command is received, a menu screen that can be operated by the administrator is displayed. (2) The door D18 is opened. When the door open flag is turned on, the sub control board S displays a menu screen that can be operated by the player when the operation of the sub input button SB is detected when the door open flag is off, and the door open flag is displayed. When the operation of the sub-input button SB is detected when is on, the menu screen that can be operated by the administrator may be displayed. While the door is open, the sound related to the door opening error is always output, and the volume related to the door opening error is a constant volume (85 dB in this example) regardless of the state of the volume switch and the volume level. It has become. In the case of Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the management menu screen (see FIG. 37) in the foreground of the display area SG10. Next, in step 2056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated while selecting "setting of the actual machine" on the management menu screen. In the case of Yes in step 2056, in step 2058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the management menu screen and displays the setting screen of the actual machine in the foreground of the display area SG10. In this embodiment, when the sub input button is operated while "setting of the actual machine" is selected on the management menu screen, the management menu screen is deleted and the setting screen of the actual machine is displayed. Not limited to this, if the sub-input button is operated while "Settings of the actual machine" is selected on the management menu screen, the management menu screen is displayed on the back layer and the setting screen of the actual machine is displayed on the front layer. That is, both the management menu screen and the setting screen of the actual machine may be displayed. Next, in step 2060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines on / off of the volume control function based on the operation of the sub-input button SB with the cross key SB-2. There is no problem if the settings other than the volume control function on / off (for example, automatic button operation settings) can be changed, but the light intensity control function is set to prevent epilepsy (a type of chronic brain disease). It is preferable to configure the setting so that it cannot be set (off setting) that cannot be adjusted by the player. Next, in step 2062, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the volume control function is determined to be off. In the case of Yes in step 2062, in step 2064, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the volume control prevention flag (if the flag is on, the player cannot perform volume control), and the following Move to processing (loop processing of sub-main side routine). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2062, in other words, when the volume control function is determined to be on, in step 2066, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the volume control prohibition flag, and the next process (sub-main side). Routine loop processing).

If No in step 2056, in step 2068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated while selecting "setting the power saving mode" on the management menu screen. In the case of Yes in step 2068, in step 4100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the power saving mode switching control process described later, and shifts to the next process (loop process of the sub-main side routine). On the other hand, if No in step 2068, in step 2070, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the management menu screen based on the operation of the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB-2. Next, in step 2072, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the setting of the game machine based on the operation of the sub-input button SB and the cross-shaped key SB-2, and next processing (loop processing of the sub-main side routine). Move to. Even if No in step 2052, the process proceeds to the next process (loop process of the sub-main side routine). When the volume control prohibition flag is turned on (when the administrator sets the volume control to be impossible), the volume level is configured to be fixed at the default setting described above in step 2004. There is. If the volume control function is turned off by the management menu, that is, if the volume control prohibition flag is turned on, the volume cannot be adjusted unless the volume control function is turned on again in the management menu. It is configured to continue. The configuration related to the management menu is as follows: (1) When an error occurs, both the volume and the amount of light are specified values (may be the maximum volume and the maximum amount of light) based on the error regardless of the setting of the management menu (2). ) Measurement of meal break time (leaving time), over-winning sound, custom logo color, menu used at factory inspection, etc. are also possible. (3) Whether volume can be adjusted and light intensity can be adjusted. Can be set individually (whether or not the volume can be adjusted and whether or not the amount of light can be adjusted can be set at the same time by one operation), (4) From effect mode A, effect mode B, and effect mode C. It may be configured such that the effect tendency can be set, such as making it possible to select an effect mode (when the effect mode is different, the frequency of occurrence of a specific specific effect is different). As a specific example of the configuration related to the measurement of the meal break time (leaving time) described above, (1) when the "break time" mark is selected and the "start" mark is determined by the sub input button, timekeeping is performed. (Measurement) starts, (2) When the time reaches the predetermined time, it can be notified by the effect display device SG, the game effect lamp D26, the voice output from the speaker D24, etc., (3) The predetermined time can be set. Yes, it can be set between 10 minutes and 60 minutes, and (4) if the power is cut off during the predetermined time timing, the time may be cleared. Further, the over-winning sound is a winning of a game ball to a large winning opening that is a predetermined number of large winning openings in the above-mentioned step 1624 (a trigger for the end of the running round) during a certain round execution. It is a sound that is output when the number of game balls exceeds the number and enters the large winning opening. The over winning sound can be selected from a plurality of types, and silence (no effect) can also be selected. In addition, the above-mentioned logo is a mark indicating the name of the company that created the game machine, and is displayed on the special game end demo time, which is the period after the end of the final round of the jackpot, and on the standby demo screen. In addition, it is possible to change the logo color and logo shape by customizing the logo color.

Next, FIG. 37 is a management menu screen display image diagram according to the present embodiment. First, the image diagram on the left side is an image for displaying the management menu, and shows an example of displaying items that can be set by the administrator (cannot be set by the player). In this example, it is configured so that the actual machine can be set, the date and time can be reset, the elapsed days can be initialized, and the power saving mode can be set. This management menu screen is displayed by turning on the power while pressing the RAM clear button in the power off state. On the management menu screen, each setting item can be selected by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 (in this example, "setting of the actual machine" is selected), and the sub input button. Setting items can be determined by pressing SB. After the completion of each setting, the setting can be completed by moving the cursor to "End of setting" at the bottom and pressing the sub input button SB. The method of terminating the management menu screen is not limited to this, and may be configured to be terminated by deciding to change various settings in "setting of the actual machine" or the like. If the setting item is determined by pressing the sub input button SB in each menu, the determined setting is performed without pressing the sub input button SB in "End setting" to end the display of the management menu screen. Is running and configured to be remembered. For example, after setting the volume control function to off (unadjustable), it is managed by turning off the power or entering the game ball into the main game start port while the management menu screen is displayed. Even when the menu display ends, the determined settings are reflected. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determined setting may not be reflected unless the display of the management menu screen is terminated by pressing the sub input button SB at "end of setting". In addition, if an error occurs during the display of the management menu (for example, an illegal winning error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls are detected in the big winning opening when the jackpot is not hit), the management menu It may be configured to execute screen display and audio output when an error occurs while maintaining the display of. In such a configuration, the screen display due to the error occurrence has a higher display priority than the display of the management menu screen, so the screen display due to the error occurrence is the front layer than the display of the management menu screen. Is displayed in. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and if an error occurs during the display of the management menu, the display of the management menu may be deleted and the screen accompanying the occurrence of the error may be displayed.

Next, the image diagram on the right side shows an example of the display screen when "setting of the actual machine" is selected. In this example, the "volume control function" can be set, and each setting item can be selected by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 ("volume control function" is selected. ), The cross key SB-2 is configured so that the function can be switched on and off by operating the left and right buttons. When it is determined to be "on", the volume control prohibition flag is turned off, and when it is determined to be "off", the volume control prohibition flag is turned on. For event 2, event 3, and event 4, items that can be set as appropriate may be provided, and for example, "automatic button operation setting" may be switched on / off. In the present embodiment, the function of "light intensity adjustment" is always enabled in consideration of epilepsy prevention and the like, and is configured so that on / off cannot be selected. The "light intensity adjustment" function may be configured so that it can be turned on and off, but in such a configuration, the default value of the light intensity is not set to the maximum value. When the function is turned off, it is preferable to set the amount of light to a value other than the maximum value, and so on.

Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the power saving mode switching control process according to the subroutine of step 4100 in FIG. First, in step 4102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the management menu screen and displays the setting screen of the actual machine in the foreground of the display area SG10. Next, in step 4104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines on / off of the power saving mode based on the operation of the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB-2. Next, in step 4106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the power saving mode is determined to be ON. If Yes in step 4106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the power saving mode to ON in step 4108. Next, in step 4110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets green (the display color when the power saving mode is on) as the display color of the power saving mode display lamp D70, and proceeds to step 4116. Further, in the case of No in step 4106, in other words, when the power saving mode is determined to be off, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the power saving mode to off in step 4112. Next, in step 4114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets red (display color when the power saving mode is off) as the display color of the power saving mode display lamp D70, and proceeds to step 4116. Next, in step 4116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is based on the power saving mode on / off, and a confirmation message (for example, when the power saving mode is turned on, the power saving operation mode is turned on. Message) is displayed on the display area SG10 for a predetermined period, and the process proceeds to the next process (loop process of the sub-main side routine).

Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the non-game period control process according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. 35. First, in step 2152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle D44 has been detected. If Yes in step 2152, the process proceeds to step 2158. On the other hand, if No in step 2152, in step 2154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation has newly started. If Yes in step 2154, the process proceeds to step 2158. On the other hand, if No in step 2154, in step 2156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a new main game hold has occurred. If Yes in step 2156, the process proceeds to step 2158. On the other hand, if No in step 2156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2157 whether or not it is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 2157, in step 2158, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the non-game period has ended, and the non-game period measurement timer HY10t (measures the period in the non-game state, step 2164, step. The increment timer starting in 3618, step 4225 and step 4048) is stopped and reset. In this example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and the hold does not exist, it is determined to be in the non-gaming state (the decorative symbol is stopped after the jackpot ends). Moreover, the state in which the hold does not exist is also a non-game state). Next, in step 2160, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a standby demo screen, a power saving screen, a first customization guidance screen, a second customization guidance screen, a customization execution screen, a light amount adjustment screen, and a volume control screen (each screen). The display image and role of (will be described later) will be deleted. Next, in step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the display on the power saving screen has been erased. In the case of Yes in step 2162, in step 2164, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the non-game period measurement timer HY10t (increment timer) and shifts to the next process (process in step 3600). If No in step 2157, it is determined that the non-gaming state has not ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3600) without executing the processes in steps 2158 to 2164. Further, even if No in step 2162, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3600). As described above, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the jackpot, the standby demo screen, the power saving screen, the first customization guidance screen, the second customization guidance screen, the customization execution screen, the light amount adjustment screen, and the volume adjustment screen are displayed. It is configured not to be displayed, and in the figure, it is shown that the processes of steps 2158 and 2164 are continuously executed during the execution of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and step 2156 is displayed at the start of the jackpot. The process of step 2160 may be executed, and the timing of the non-game period measurement timer HY10t may not be started during the execution of the jackpot.

Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the customized control process according to the subroutine of step 3600 in FIG. 35. First, in step 3600-1, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is currently in the jackpot, or in the time saving (time reduction gaming state), in other words, the jackpot is not executed and is not. It is determined whether or not the time is shortened (non-time shortened game state). In the case of Yes in step 3600-1, in step 3601, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the power saving screen is currently being displayed. In the case of Yes in step 3601, in step 3602, in the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the non-game period measurement timer value is the first guide value (the timer value on which the first customized guide screen is displayed, and in this example, 5 Seconds) or more is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3602, in step 3604, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the first customization guidance screen in the foreground of the display area SG10. In this example, the volume level, light intensity level, and automatic button operation settings (collectively referred to as game machine customization) can be changed by the player, and the game machine customization is executed. The display that notifies the transition conditions of the screen to be displayed is called the customization guidance screen. The customization guidance screen has a two-stage display mode depending on the non-game period, and since the non-game period can be displayed in a short time, the first customization guidance screen → the second customization guidance screen. The mode of notifying the transition condition of the screen for executing the game machine customization is not limited to this, and (1) the first customization guidance screen is displayed at the timing when the non-game period measurement timer value reaches 5 seconds. The timing when the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB-2 are lit (the lamps provided on the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB-2 are lit) and the non-game period measurement timer value reaches 75 seconds. Display the second customization guidance screen at (2) Sub-input at the timing when the non-game period is started (non-game period measurement timer value = 0 and measurement of the non-game period measurement timer HY10t is started). The button SB and the cross key SB-2 may be lit. Next, in step 3650, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the customization guidance screen display control process described later. Next, in step 4200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the customization execution display control process described later, and proceeds to step 3606. If No in step 3602, in step 4250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the customized control process during the game, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 3606. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first customization screen is displayed 5 seconds after the start of the non-gaming period, and even if the sub input button SB is operated before the elapse of 5 seconds. It is configured so that the automatic button operation setting, volume level or light intensity level cannot be changed via the customize screen (it is possible to change the automatic button operation setting, volume level or light intensity level without going through the customize screen). Is). The configuration is not limited to this, and the automatic button operation setting, volume level, or light intensity level can be changed regardless of whether or not the customization screen is used until 5 seconds have passed since the non-game period started. May be configured so that In addition, the customization guidance screen may be displayed even during the time reduction, and the volume, light intensity, and automatic button operation settings may be customized. The configuration may be such that the amount of light can be customized only when the operation of SB-2) is performed (the volume and automatic button operation settings can be set even during fluctuations).

Next, in step 3606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the non-game period measurement timer value is equal to or greater than the default set value (900 seconds in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3606, in step 3608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the automatic button flag. Next, in step 3610, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the volume switch V10 is “large”. In the case of Yes in step 3610, in step 3612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the volume level to the default value (“5” in this example), and proceeds to step 3614. If No in step 3610, the process proceeds to step 3614 without setting the volume level to the default value. Next, in step 3614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the power saving mode is currently on. In the case of Yes in step 3614, in step 3616, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the power saving screen and shifts to the next process (process of step 3700). In this way, when the power saving screen is displayed, the result is No in step 3601, and the display control process such as the customization executing screen described later is not executed. If the display conditions of the power saving screen are satisfied when the customized screen etc. is displayed, the displayed customization executing screen etc. will be deleted (the power saving screen is displayed on the front layer). Then, the screen during customization may be displayed on the back layer). On the other hand, if No in step 3614, in step 3618, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets the non-game period measurement timer HY10t (increment timer) to start, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 3700). .. Even if No in step 3600-1, step 3601, and step 3606, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3700). Here, in this example, when the non-game period is 900 seconds or more, which is the default setting value, the automatic button operation setting and the volume level can be changed to the default setting. Regarding the volume level, the volume switch V10 Only when is "Large", the default setting due to the passage of non-game time can be executed. That is, regarding the default setting of the volume level, when the power is "off → on", the volume level becomes the default value in all cases where the volume switch is "large / medium / small" (default setting). Is executed), but when the non-game period has passed 900 seconds, the volume level becomes the default value only when the volume switch is "large", and when the volume switch is "medium / small". Is configured so that the volume level does not become the default value (the default setting is not executed). Also, when the power saving mode is on, all game machine customization is configured to be infeasible, and although not shown, the power saving mode is turned off (for example, by operating the sub input button SB). If it is turned off), the game machine customization can be executed and the user is notified that the game machine customization can be executed (for example, the first customization guide is provided when the power saving mode is turned off). The screen is displayed).

Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the customized guidance screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 3650 in FIG. 40. First, in step 3652, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the up / down buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. The cross key SB-2 has four buttons, an up button, a down button, a right button, and a left button, as operable buttons. In the case of Yes in step 3652, in step 3655, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is displaying the customization guidance screen (the first customization guidance screen and the second customization guidance screen are collectively referred to as the customization guidance screen). It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 3655, in step 3656, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed customization screen, displays the light amount adjustment screen in the foreground of the display area SG10, and proceeds to step 3668. On the other hand, even if No in step 3655, the process proceeds to step 3668. If the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 is operated while the standby demo screen is displayed, the light amount adjustment screen (screen for executing the light amount adjustment) is not displayed, but the light amount can be adjusted. (It is the same process as the customization control process during the game, which will be described later).

If No in step 3652, in step 3658, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 3658, in step 3660, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed customization screen and standby demo screen, and the customization execution screen (for switching the automatic button operation setting on / off). The screen) is displayed in the foreground of the display area, and the process proceeds to step 3668. The configuration of the standby demo screen applicable to this example is as follows: (1) The volume during the standby demo screen display is relatively low or silent (details will be described later), and (2) Standby. The demo display period (the maximum display period of the period during which the standby demo screen can be displayed) is longer than the demo start value (240 seconds) (for example, 660 seconds), (3) of the standby demo screen. Even if the game ball does not enter the main game start port during the display, the display of the standby demo screen ends due to the detection of the launch handle D44. (4) The non-game period starts in the time-reduced game state. Even if the value (240 seconds) is reached, the standby demo screen is not displayed, and only the volume is the same as when the standby demo screen is displayed. The detection of the firing handle D44 when the standby demo screen is being displayed (or during a specific period of the non-gaming period), or when the maximum volume that can be output is relatively low (may be in a mute state). Displays a specific right-handed instruction display or outputs audio (details will be described later), (6) While the standby demo screen is displayed, when the sub input button SB is operated, the customized execution screen is displayed on the front layer. , The symbol fluctuation stop display screen (the state where the stop symbol of the normal decorative symbol is displayed) is displayed on the rear layer, and the symbol fluctuation stop display screen is displayed depending on the detection of the launch handle D44, and the cross key SB-2 is pressed. When operated, the standby demo screen will continue to be displayed, but the volume and amount of light will be changed. As a specific display example of the standby demo screen, a moving image for executing the game explanation and a motif introduction (character introduction or notice introduction) of the game machine may be displayed. The display condition of the standby demo screen is not limited to the non-game period being the demo start value (240 seconds in this example). For example, the time during which the operation of the launch handle D44 is not detected. The standby demo screen is displayed when (or the time when the game ball is not fired) reaches the predetermined time A (10 seconds), and the maximum display time of the standby demo screen is configured to be the predetermined time B (100 seconds). You may. In such a configuration, the predetermined time A (10 seconds) is longer than the shortest fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) in the game machine and shorter than the maximum fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds). Is. Further, the predetermined time B (10 seconds) is also longer than the shortest fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) in the game machine and shorter than the maximum fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds). In addition, the time during which the operation of the launch handle D44 is not detected (or the time during which the game ball is not fired) is greater than the average time from when the game ball is launched onto the game board surface until it flows into the out port D36. It is preferable that the predetermined time A (10 seconds) is longer (to prevent the standby demo screen from being displayed even though the player is firing the game ball).

If No in step 3658, in step 3662, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. If Yes in step 3662, in step 3664, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the volume control prohibition flag is off. If Yes in step 3664, in step 3665, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the customization guidance screen is being displayed. In the case of Yes in step 3665, in step 3666, the displayed customization screen is erased, the volume control screen is displayed in the foreground of the display area SG10, and the process proceeds to step 3668. On the other hand, if No in step 3665, the process proceeds to step 3668. If the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated while the standby demo screen is displayed, the volume control screen (screen for executing volume control) is not displayed, but the volume can be adjusted. (It is the same process as the customization control process during the game, which will be described later). In addition, the volume control screen may be hidden during the symbol variation display, the standby demo screen, or the symbol variation stop display screen, and the volume control screen may always be displayed while the symbol variation stop display screen is displayed. It may be displayed so that the volume level can be adjusted with the cross key SB-2 and the volume control screen can be changed according to the volume level, or the volume control screen can always be displayed during the symbol variation display. It may be displayed so that the cross key SB-2 can be used to adjust the volume level and change the display of the volume adjustment screen according to the volume level.

Here, to summarize the processing of steps 3662 to 3666,
(1) When the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated while the first customization guidance screen is displayed and the volume adjustment prohibition flag is on → The volume adjustment screen is not displayed and the volume level is Cannot be changed (2) When the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated while the 1st customization guidance screen is displayed and the volume adjustment prohibition flag is off → The volume adjustment screen is displayed, and according to the display Volume level can be changed (3) When the left / right button of the cross key SB-2 is operated while the standby demo screen is displayed and the volume adjustment prohibition flag is off → The volume adjustment screen is not displayed (standby) The demo screen remains displayed), and the volume level can be changed.

Next, in step 3668, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the non-game period measurement timer value becomes the demo start value (240 seconds) or more. In the case of Yes in step 3668, in step 3670, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the standby demo screen in the foreground of the display area SG10. Next, in step 3672, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the demo screen mode in the sub-side game state type, and shifts to the next process (process of step 4200). In the present embodiment, the standby demo screen is displayed when the non-game period measurement timer value becomes the demo start value, but the display start condition of the standby demo screen is limited to this. For example, when the non-game period measurement timer value becomes the demo start value in the non-time shortened game state, the standby demo screen is displayed, while the non-game period measurement timer value starts the demo in the time shortened game state. When the value is reached, the standby demo screen may not be displayed (in the time-reduced gaming state, the standby demo screen may not be displayed regardless of the non-game period measurement timer value). Further, in such a configuration, the volume output when the non-game period measurement timer value becomes the demo start value is "1" which is the volume of the demo screen mode regardless of the game state (Fig.). 45) or silence, that is, lower than the current volume setting (volume determined by the volume switch and volume level) or silence, and the amount of light Similarly, it may be configured to be lower or silent than the current set value of the amount of light (the amount of light determined from the amount of light level). Further, in the time-reduced gaming state, the non-game time measurement timer HY10t may not be measured (the timer value is always 0 and the time is not measured).

If No in step 3668, in step 3674, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has the non-game period measurement timer value as the second guide value (the timer value on which the second customized guide screen is displayed. In this example, , 75 seconds) or more is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3674, in step 3676, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the second customization guidance screen in the foreground of the display area SG10, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4200). Even if No in step 3664 or step 3674, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4200). Although the customization guidance screen is not displayed while the standby demo screen is displayed, the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB-2 are lit (on the edge of the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB-2). It may be configured so that it is provided with a lamp that can be turned on (it is turned on even while the customization screen is displayed).

Next, FIG. 42 is an example of a customized guide screen image diagram according to the present embodiment. First, the upper left part is the first customization guidance screen, the upper right part is the second customization guidance screen, and the lower left part is the standby demo screen. When 5 seconds have passed from the stop of the symbol change in the non-game state, The first customization guidance screen is displayed. On the first customization screen, it is displayed that the automatic button operation setting can be changed by pressing the sub input button SB, and the method of adjusting the volume and the amount of light is not displayed. The display of the first customization screen is semi-transparent, and even if the display of the first customization guidance screen and the decorative design are displayed so as to overlap each other, the decorative design can be visually recognized. Further, by pressing the sub input button SB while the first customization guidance screen is displayed, it is possible to customize the actual machine (change the automatic button operation setting).

Next, after the first customization guidance screen is displayed, when 70 seconds have passed in the non-game state (75 seconds have passed since the non-game period), the second customization guidance screen is displayed. Is displayed. In the second customized guide screen, in addition to the display mode of the first customized guide screen, a guide image for adjusting the volume and a guide image for adjusting the amount of light are added to the lower part of the display area SG10. The first customization guidance screen and the second customization guidance screen are semi-transparent like the first customization guidance screen.

Next, after the second customization guidance screen is displayed, when 165 seconds have passed in the non-game state (240 seconds have passed since the non-game period), the standby demo screen is displayed. Is displayed. In the standby demo screen, the display of the first customization guidance screen and the second customization guidance screen is deleted, and the story display and the like are displayed. The standby demo screen is not semi-transparent, and when the display of the standby demo screen and the decorative symbol are displayed overlapping, the decorative symbol is invisible or difficult to see (display of the decorative symbol). The display area is smaller than that of the standby demo screen, the decorative pattern is displayed on the rear layer rather than the standby demo screen, etc.). When the on-adjustment prohibition flag is on, the on-adjustment display is not displayed on the second customization guidance screen.

Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the customization execution display control process according to the subroutine of step 4200 in FIG. 40. First, in step 4202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the light amount adjustment screen is being displayed. In the case of Yes in step 4202, in step 4204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the up / down buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes in step 4204, in step 4206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the selected light amount level based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and executes lighting in the confirmation lighting pattern. , Step 4220. In the present embodiment, when adjusting the light intensity level,
(1) When the light intensity level is selected with the cross key SB-2, it lights up with a confirmation lighting pattern corresponding to the selected light intensity level. (2) When the light intensity level is determined by the sub input button SB, A confirmation notification display for notifying which light amount level has been determined is displayed in the display area SG10 (outputs audio).
(3) The lighting mode of the confirmation lighting pattern is the same as the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness of the “effect system A” of the “illumination table 2” in FIG. 69 (the number of times the lighting pattern is repeated is 2).
It is configured as described above.

If No in step 4202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 4208 whether or not the volume control screen is being displayed. In the case of Yes in step 4208, in step 4210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes in step 4210, in step 4212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the selected volume level and outputs a confirmation sound based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and in step 4220. Transition. In the present embodiment, when adjusting the volume level,
(1) When the volume level is selected with the cross key SB-2, the confirmation sound corresponding to the selected volume level is output. (2) When the volume level is determined with the sub input button SB, the volume level A confirmation notification display for notifying which decision has been made is displayed in the display area SG10 (sound is output).
(3) The volume of the confirmation sound is the same as that of the “non-error volume determination table” in FIG. 71.
It is configured as described above. It should be noted that the above-mentioned volume control screen may be always displayed (or always displayed during the symbol stop display, the symbol variation display, etc.) without outputting the above confirmation sound.

If No in step 4208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 4214 whether or not the customization execution screen is being displayed. In the case of Yes in step 4214, in step 4216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes in step 4216, in step 4218, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S switches the on / off selection of the automatic button operation based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and proceeds to step 4220. In the present embodiment, when the automatic button operation setting is changed, when the on / off of the automatic button operation setting is determined by the cross key SB-2, an announcement corresponding to the on / off is displayed (on). Display example: "Automatic button operation setting is turned on, automatic button operation setting is turned off by pressing a button during the game", Display example when off: "Automatic button operation setting is off" By pressing and holding the button during the game, the automatic button operation setting will be turned on. ") In addition, even if No in step 4216, the process proceeds to discard 4220.

Next, in step 4220, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button has been operated, in other words, whether or not the volume level, light intensity level, or automatic button operation setting has been determined. If Yes in step 4220, the process proceeds to step 4224. On the other hand, if No in step 4220, in step 4222, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the customization screen display. In the case of Yes in step 4222, in step 4224, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is determined by the currently selected volume level, light intensity level, or automatic button operation setting (game machine customization setting), and then the customization screen is deleted. To do. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game machine customization setting is determined when the predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed without operating the sub input button SB or operating the sub input button SB on the customize screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, (1) the operation of the launch handle D44 is detected, (2) the symbol change has started, and (3) a predetermined entry port (for example, the first main) is used. When a game ball enters the game start port A10), the game machine customization setting may be determined. In addition, even if the decorative symbol symbol variation is started while the customize screen is displayed, the customize screen remains displayed (the customize screen is displayed on the front layer rather than the decorative symbol variation display), and the game machine customization is executed. It may be configured as possible.

Next, in step 4225, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets the non-game period measurement timer (increment timer) and starts. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the non-game period starts from the timing when the game machine customization setting is determined. Next, in step 4226, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the automatic button operation setting is determined to be ON. In the case of Yes in step 4226, in step 4228, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the automatic button flag and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3606). On the other hand, if No in step 4226, in step 4230, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the automatic button operation setting is determined to be off. In the case of Yes in step 4230, in step 4232, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the automatic button flag and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3606). Even if No in step 4214, step 4222, or step 4230, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3606).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode related to the game machine customization from the start of the non-game period (the timing when the measurement of the non-game period measurement timer HY10t starts) is "non-game period measurement timer value = 0 seconds". → Start of non-game period ”→“ Non-game period measurement timer value = 5 seconds → Start of display of the first customization guidance screen, customization screen (customization execution screen, light amount adjustment screen and volume adjustment screen are collectively customized screen ”→“ Start of transitionable period ”→“ Non-game period measurement timer value = 75 seconds → Start of display of second customization guidance screen ”→“ Non-game period measurement timer value = 240 seconds → Start of display of standby demo screen, customization It was configured to be "End of screen transitionable period"-> "Non-game period measurement timer value = 900 seconds-> Execute default setting, start displaying screen during power saving", but it is not limited to this, for example, "Non-game" Period measurement timer value = 0 seconds → Start of non-game period "→" Non-game period measurement timer value = 5 seconds → Start of transitionable period of customization screen (screen display does not change) "→" Non-game period measurement timer value = 75 seconds → Start displaying the second customization guidance screen, start lighting the lamps provided on the sub input button SB and cross key SB-2 ”→“ Non-game period measurement timer value = 240 seconds → Start displaying the standby demo screen, It may be configured to be "end of transitionable period of customization screen"-> "non-game period measurement timer value = 900 seconds-> execute default setting, start of display of power saving screen". The start of the transitionable period of the customization screen means that the period in which the customization screen is displayed is started by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB-2.

Next, FIG. 44 is an example of an image diagram of the customization guide screen according to the present embodiment. First, in the left part of the figure, the player operates the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 when the first customized guidance screen or the second customized guidance screen is displayed on the effect display device SG. The display mode of the volume control setting screen displayed in the case is shown. Specifically, when the first customization guidance screen or the second customization guidance screen is displayed, when the player operates the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2, the volume control screen is displayed and the volume control screen is displayed. If the left button of the cross key SB-2 is pressed during the display of, the confirmation sound from the speaker D24 becomes smaller, and the lighting part (white part) of the volume display in the upper speaker schematic diagram decreases. (Indicating that the volume level becomes smaller), when the right button of SB-2 of the cross key is pressed, the confirmation sound from the speaker D24 becomes louder, and the volume display in the upper speaker schematic diagram is displayed. The lighting portion (white portion) of is increasing (indicating that the volume level is increased), and the volume level being selected is determined by pressing the sub input button SB.

Next, the central part of the figure is displayed when the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 is operated when the first customized guidance screen or the second customized guidance screen is displayed on the effect display device SG. The display mode of the setting screen for adjusting the amount of light is shown. Specifically, when the player operates the up / down buttons of the cross key SB-2, the light amount adjustment screen is displayed, and the first customization guidance screen or the second customization guidance screen is displayed while the light amount adjustment screen is displayed. If the upper button of the cross key SB-2 is pressed, the petal-shaped lighting part displayed on the effect display device SG is in three stages of "0 → 6 → 12". When the number increases (indicating that the light intensity level increases) and the lower button of SB-2 of the cross key is pressed, the petal-shaped lighting part displayed on the effect display device SG becomes 12 It is configured to decrease in 3 steps of → 6 → 0 (indicating that the light level becomes smaller), and by pressing the sub input button SB, the selected light level is determined. There is. Even if the cross key SB-2 is operated when the standby demo screen is displayed, the volume control screen and the light amount control screen are not displayed, but the volume level and the light amount level itself can be changed. In the figure, the display corresponding to the light intensity level is a petal-shaped display, and the lighting part is configured to increase in three stages of "0 → 6 → 12", but this is limited. Instead, the lighting portion may be configured to increase in three stages of "1 → 2 → 3", or three petal-shaped displays may be provided (the size of the display area is different, It may be configured to increase in three stages of (three large, medium, and small petals) and "small → medium → large".

Next, the right part of the figure is displayed when the sub input button SB is operated when the first customization guidance screen, the second customization guidance screen, or the standby demo screen is displayed on the effect display device SG. The display mode of the customization execution screen is shown. Specifically, when the player operates the sub input button SB, the customization screen is displayed, and when the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are pressed on the customization screen, the automatic button operation settings of "ON" and "OFF" are set. The cursor is moved, and by pressing the sub-input button SB, the setting of the selected cursor is determined. Here, if it is decided as "ON", the automatic button operation setting screen is deleted and "Automatic button operation setting is turned on, automatic button operation is turned off by pressing the button during the game" is displayed. Will be done. On the other hand, if it is decided as "OFF", the automatic button operation setting screen disappears and "Automatic button operation setting is turned off, automatic button operation is turned on by pressing and holding the button during the game" is displayed. To.

Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the in-game customized control process according to the subroutine of step 4250 in FIG. 40. First, in step 4251, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the automatic button flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 4251, in step 4252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S holds down the sub-input button SB (in this process, pressing and holding the sub-input button SB continuously for 1 second or longer is long-pressed. ) Is detected or not. In the present embodiment, the operating member for determining the long press in step 4252 is the sub input button SB, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lever SB-3 may be used, or the sub input button SB and the lever. It may be configured to determine any long press with the SB-3. In the case of Yes in step 4252, in step 4254, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the button validity period (single button press effect, button repeated press effect, button long press effect, or hidden button effect) during the long press period. Period for accepting operation of sub-input button SB due to symbol fluctuation = period for effect to be executed by operating sub-input button SB) or lever effective period (lever single-shot pull effect, lever continuous pull effect, lever prolongation effect, Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the period for accepting the operation of the lever SB-3 due to the symbol variation for executing the hidden button effect = the period during which the effect is executed by operating the lever SB-3) is not straddled. Here, when the long press period extends over the button valid period (or lever valid period), (1) the sub-input button SB is started to be pressed before the button valid period (or lever valid period) starts. After that, the pressing of the sub input button SB is held for 1 second, and if the button is valid during the 1 second, (2) the sub input button SB is pressed during the button valid period (or lever valid period). When the button is started, the sub-input button SB is held for 1 second, and the button valid period (or lever valid period) is not reached (or the button valid period has expired) when the 1 second elapses. .. In the case of Yes in step 4254, in step 4256, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the non-game period measurement timer value is smaller than the first guide value (5 seconds in this example). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the non-gaming period elapses for 5 seconds or more, the first customization guidance screen is displayed, so that the change of the automatic button operation setting by long-pressing the sub input button SB is invalid. The press of the sub-input button SB is started before the non-game period elapses for 5 seconds, and then the sub-input button SB is held for 1 second, and the non-game period is 5 seconds or more when the 1 second elapses. Even if it has passed, the change of the automatic button operation setting by long-pressing the sub input button SB becomes invalid. In the case of Yes in step 4256, in step 4258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation is such that the hidden button effect is executed. In the case of Yes in step 4258, in step 4260, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the automatic button flag and proceeds to step 4264. In addition, even if No in step 4252, step 4254, step 4256 or step 4258, the process proceeds to step 4264.

Further, in the case of No in step 4251, in other words, when the automatic button flag is on, in step 4262, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the operation of the sub-input button SB has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 4262, in step 4263, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the automatic button flag and proceeds to step 4264. In addition, even if No in step 4262, the process proceeds to step 4264. In the present embodiment, when the automatic button flag is on, the automatic button flag is turned off when the sub input button is pressed once, and when the sub input button is pressed and held, the automatic button is turned off. The flag may be configured to be off or may not be configured to be off. Further, as a specific example in which the automatic button flag is turned off by operating the sub input button SB when the automatic button flag is turned on during the game,
(1) Button effect (single button press effect, button repeated press effect, button long press effect) Automatic button input at the time of execution (By turning on the automatic button flag, button continuous press effect etc. can be performed without operating the sub input button SB. If the player operates the sub-input button SB before the execution is executed (sometimes referred to as button auto-input),
(2) When the player operates the sub-input button SB during the automatic button input in the button repeated press effect or the button long press effect.
(3) Automatic button input is not executed When the player operates the sub input button SB during the execution of the advance notice effect,
Etc. can be exemplified.

Next, in step 4264, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the operation of the up / down buttons of the cross key SB-2 has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 4264, in step 4266, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adjusts the light intensity level based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3606). On the other hand, if No in step 4264, in step 4268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4268, in step 4270, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adjusts the volume level based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3606). Even if No in step 4269, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3606). As described above, in the present embodiment, the light amount level and the volume level can be adjusted by operating the cross key SB-2 even when it is not in the non-gaming period. Specifically, the cross key SB-2 is configured. The upper button increases the amount of light by one step, the lower button of the cross key SB-2 decreases the amount of light by one step, the right button of the cross key SB-2 increases the volume by one step, and the left of the cross key SB-2 increases the volume by one step. The volume is increased by one step with the button. In the present embodiment, an effect of operating the cross key SB-2 (an effect of executing a notice effect or the like by operating the cross key SB-2) is provided in the effect during the game (for example, a button effect). However, if such an effect is provided, it is impossible to adjust the light amount level and the volume level by operating the cross key SB-2 during the valid period of the cross key SB-2 in the effect. It is desirable to configure. Further, it may be possible to change other than the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key SB-2. For example, the effect mode (by changing the effect, the probability of occurrence of a specific effect increases or decreases, or the tendency of the effect to be executed is different. ) May be changeable. In such a configuration, for example, the volume and the effect mode can be changed by operating the cross key SB-2 while the symbol is changing, and the volume and light intensity can be changed by operating the cross key SB-2 while the standby demo screen is displayed. And the effect mode may be changed. In addition, during the symbol change (or during the symbol change and before 5 seconds have passed from the start of the non-game period), the volume level can be adjusted by operating the cross key SB-2, while the cross key SB-2 can be used. It may be configured so that the light intensity level cannot be adjusted by operation.

Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the music selection process according to the subroutine of step 3700 in FIG. 35. First, in step 3702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a music-selectable jackpot is being executed. In other words, depending on the type of jackpot to be executed (type of jackpot symbol) and the game state when the jackpot is won (when the jackpot symbol is stopped), it depends on whether the music can be selected or not. For example, it stops during a short time. It can be configured so that the music can be selected only when the symbol 7B (the probability fluctuation jackpot of 10 rounds in the second main game stop symbol), and the music cannot be selected in the other jackpots. In the case of Yes in step 3702, in step 3704, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the jackpot music selection process, which is a process for causing the player to select a music during the jackpot, which will be described later. On the other hand, if No in step 3702, in step 3706, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is currently in the time saving (non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state, or probability variation game state and time reduction game state). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3706, in step 3708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a time-saving medium music selection process, which is a process for causing the player to select a music during the time-saving (time-saving game state), which will be described later. To do. After the end of step 3704, after the end of step 3708, or if No in step 3706, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3800).

Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the jackpot music selection process according to the subroutine of step 3704 in FIG. First, in step 3704-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is a music selection valid period (a period during which music selection is possible). To supplement the music selection validity period, the jackpot start demo time (the period from the start of the jackpot to the start of opening the jackpot in the first round of the jackpot) and the jackpot end demo time (the jackpot of the final round in the jackpot) During the period from the end of opening the winning opening to the end of the jackpot), music selection is not possible. Further, in the jackpot where the music can be selected, a selection time of a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) is set after the jackpot start demo time ends, and (1) when the sub input button SB is pressed to determine the music. (2) When a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) elapses without performing button operations (operations of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2) after the end of the jackpot start demo time, (3) Cross key SB- When a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) elapses after the up button or the down button (sometimes referred to as the up / down button) of 2 is operated, or if any of the conditions is satisfied, at that time. The song on which the cursor is located is determined, and the song selection validity period ends. In other words, from the start of opening the big winning opening in the first round in the big hit (from the end of the big hit start demo time), operate the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, and then operate the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2. By operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 again before the predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) elapses, the music selection valid period is continued across the rounds, and the music selection valid period until the end of the final round in the jackpot. It is also possible to continue. If the specification is such that the music on which the cursor is located is forcibly determined at the end of a specific round, the music being selected will be determined against the player's intention, which is not desirable for the player. In particular, the more songs that are selected, the longer it takes to select a song (song confirmation time per song x number of selected songs = song selection time), so the song selection time is sufficient as in the present invention. The configuration that can be secured works effectively. If the music is not determined until the end of the final round in the jackpot, the music determined at the start of the jackpot will be taken over and output in the time-reduced gaming state after the jackpot ends. That is, it is a process that considers that the player has no intention of making a choice. Further, when the music selection valid period is 5 seconds remaining, the countdown display is started in order to notify the player of the remaining time. Of course, the display is not limited to the countdown display by the image, and the notification may be made by voice, lighting of the LED, or the like, or may be combined to notify the notification.

In the case of Yes in step 3704-1, in step 3704-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the up / down buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes in step 3704-2, in step 3704-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects a music (first option) corresponding to the operation of the up and down buttons, outputs the selected music, and outputs the selected music. The process proceeds to step 3704-4. At this time, the output of the selected song is started from a predetermined point in the middle of the song (for example, a chorus or just before entering the chorus). When the output is started from a point in the middle of the music, it is preferable to configure the music so that the player can immediately determine which music by listening to the music, such as just before entering the chorus or the chorus. With such a configuration, the player can easily select a desired music. In particular, when there are many selectable songs, the player selects the music for a long time, which works more effectively. When "Random" (second option) for selecting a song is selected on the game machine side, when "Random" is selected and the song is not selected (the song is not determined). If the dedicated music that is output only is output and the conditions (1), (2), and (3) for determining the above-mentioned music are satisfied, it is determined that "Random" has been determined. Then, the music is determined by the music selection at the time of selecting "Random" described later, and the output of the determined music is started in step 3704-8 described later. On the other hand, if No in step 3704-2, the process proceeds to step 3704-4. When outputting a dedicated song that is output only when "Random" is selected, it may be output (cue) from the beginning of the song or may be output from the middle.

The point in the middle of the music is not limited to the chorus or just before entering the chorus, and it is also possible to configure the music to be played from the characteristic riff of the music. Further, in the case of a music starting from a chorus, output (cueing) = starting from the chorus from the beginning of the music, so such a configuration may be used.

Also, as an output method starting from rust,
Either (1) a method of playing back from a predetermined playback point using one piece of music data (2) a method of separately providing music data starting from a chorus may be used. Further, in the latter case, since the time from when the player moves the cursor to the music to the determination is set to a predetermined time (7 seconds), the music data starting from the chorus is a predetermined time (7 seconds). It is sufficient to prepare data that slightly exceeds.

Next, in step 3704, it is determined whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes in step 3704-4, in step 3704-5, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the character displayed on the liquid crystal in response to the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2, and corresponds to this. Start outputting music. At this time, as in the case where the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated, the output of the music is started from a predetermined point in the middle of the music (for example, a chorus or just before entering the chorus). On the other hand, if No in step 3704-4, the process proceeds to step 3704-6.

Next, in step 3704-6, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. If Yes in step 3704-6, the currently selected song is determined in step 3704-8, and the output of the determined song is started. In step 3704-8, the output is started from the beginning of the determined music. If No in step 3704-6, in step 3704-7, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the timing of the end of the music selection valid period. In the case of Yes in step 3704-7, the process proceeds to step 3704-8, and the determination and output of the music are started. After the end of step 3704-8, if the case is No in step 3704-1, and the case is No in step 3704-7, the process proceeds to step 3704-9.

Next, in step 3704-9, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the music has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 3704-9, in step 3704-10, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is an effect (an effect during a big hit, for example, an effect for notifying a probability change, an effect for notifying a round promotion). ) Is not the button validity period. In the case of Yes in step 3704-10, in step 3704-12, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the up / down buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes in step 3704-12, in step 3704-13, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the amount of light in response to the operation of the up and down buttons of the ten-key SB-2, and displays an image showing the amount of light on the liquid crystal. After (see, for example, FIG. 44), the process proceeds to step 3704-14. Even if No in step 3704-12, the process proceeds to step 3704-14. Next, in step 3704-14, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the left button or the right button (sometimes referred to as a left / right button) of the cross key SB-2 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 3704-14, in step 3704-15, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the volume in response to the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2, and displays an image showing the volume on the liquid crystal display (directing). It is displayed on the display device SG) (see, for example, FIG. 44), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3800). On the other hand, if No in step 3704-10, the control corresponding to the operation effect of the sub-input button SB is executed in step 3704-11, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3800). If No in step 3704-9 and No in step 3704-14, the process proceeds to the next process (step 3800).

If the power is turned off in the undecided state of the song during the big hit (in the situation where the big hit is being executed and the song is not decided) and then the power is restored, the following configuration may be performed. Good.
(1) A dedicated jackpot effect is executed when the power is restored (BGM corresponding to the dedicated jackpot effect when the power is restored is output), and music selection becomes impossible. In this case, when the game is in a time-reduced game state after the jackpot ends, the music selected at the jackpot start is output instead of the BGM corresponding to the jackpot effect dedicated to when the power is restored.
(2) In the round in which the power is restored, the display mode of the liquid crystal screen (display area SG10 of the effect display device SG), the sound output mode, and the LED lighting mode are dedicated to the power return (for example, the liquid crystal screen is "screen return". "Medium", no sound is output, LED is not output, etc.), and in the next round of the round in which the power is restored, the display mode of the LCD screen before the power outage occurs, the sound output mode, and the LED lighting mode are restored. Then, the big hit production will continue.

Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the time-saving and medium-time music selection process according to the subroutine of step 3708 in FIG. First, in step 3708-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the music selection screen is displayed. In the case of Yes in step 3708-1, in step 3708-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the music selection screen display timing (for example, super reach is executed, the lost symbol is stopped, and then the normal screen return timing. It is judged whether or not the jackpot end demo time end ting, etc.). In the case of Yes in step 3708-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the music selection screen in step 3708-3, and proceeds to step 3708-4. On the other hand, if the case is No in step 3708-1, the process proceeds to step 3708-4 even if the case is No in step 3708-2.

Next, in step 3708-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the music selection is effective. In the case of Yes in step 3708-4, in step 3708-5, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is executing a specific effect (for example, a specific character zone and a look-ahead zone effect, the details of which will be described later). To judge. If Yes in step 3708-5, the process proceeds to step 3708-9. On the other hand, if No in step 3708-5, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the music selection screen in step 3708-6 and proceeds to step 3708-9. The music selection screen is erased from the liquid crystal during the specific production, but the music can be selected. However, the music in the music selection is not output, and the BGM corresponding to the specific effect remains output. That is, even if the player operates the cross key SB-2 during the execution of the specific effect, the BGM corresponding to the specific effect is still output, but the music output after the execution of the specific effect is completed is the specific effect. It can be different from the music that was output before the start of execution of. The start timing of the specific effect is, for example, (1) the start of fluctuation, (2) a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and (3) a specific time after the start of fluctuation (3). For example, after 3.15 seconds) has passed. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3708-4, in step 3708-7, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a BGM change notice (a notice that the BGM changes from the start of the fluctuation, for example, it is almost certain that it will be a big hit. Or the jackpot expectation is relatively high). In the case of Yes in step 3708-7, in step 3708-8, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the music selection screen and proceeds to step 3708-9. In addition, even if No in step 3708-7, the process proceeds to step 3708-9.

Next, in step 3708-9, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the up / down buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes in step 3708-9, in step 3708-10, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects (determines) a song corresponding to the operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 {in the time saving, the cross key Music selection by operating the up and down buttons of SB-2 = music determination, and thereafter, it may be described as "selection (decision)"}, and output of the corresponding music is started. At this time, the output is started not from the beginning of the music but from a predetermined intermediate point (for example, chorus). In the case of BGM change notice, even if the up / down buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated, the music selection display screen may not be changed and the music may not be changed. In this case, the BGM may be used. The change notice is different from the normal notice (in the situation where the song selection screen is displayed, the song can be selected by operating the up and down buttons during the normal notice, but when the BGM changes, the up and down buttons Since the music cannot be selected by the operation), it is suggested to the player that this fluctuation has a high degree of expectation. The production mode of the BGM change notice is not limited to this, and when the BGM change notice is executed, a BGM dedicated to the execution of the BGM change notice is output, and the music name is used as the name of the music on which the cursor of the music selection screen is located. The BGM dedicated to the execution of the BGM change notice may be displayed, and the music may not be selected by operating the up and down buttons. After the completion of step 3708-10, or if No in step 3708-9, the process proceeds to step 3708-11. Next, in step 3708-11, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes in step 3708-11, in step 3708-12, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the volume in response to the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2, and displays an image showing the volume on the liquid crystal. (See, for example, FIG. 44), and the process proceeds to step 3708-13. On the other hand, when No in step 3708-11, the process proceeds to step 3708-13. Next, in step 3708-13, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the music has been changed. In the case of Yes in step 3708-13, in step 3708-14, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to switch to the background image corresponding to the determined music at the start timing of the next fluctuation, and the start of the next fluctuation is started. Switch the background image at the timing. After the end of step 3708-14, or if No in step 3708-13, the process proceeds to the next process (step 3800).

That is, in the jackpot song selection process, the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 are used to change and select a song one by one until the song is determined (the song is selected by operating the sub input button SB). The left and right buttons are used to change the character and change and select the song corresponding to the character (changed to the first song of the song corresponding to the character), and after the song is decided The up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 will be used to change the amount of light of the LED, and the left and right buttons will be used to change the volume. With this configuration, various effect displays and sound outputs can be realized without providing an operation unit (for example, a button) corresponding to the sub-control board S side more than necessary. In the time-saving and medium-time music selection process, the music is selected (determined) only by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, and the music can be changed by a simpler operation than during the big hit.

In addition to the above-described embodiment, it can be configured as follows.
(1) If the other operation is performed while one of the cross key SB-2 (up / down / left / right buttons) and the sub input button SB is being operated, only the previously operated button operation (one operation) is valid. Yes, the button operation (the other operation) that was operated later becomes invalid.
(2) If the other operation is performed during the operation of one of the cross key SB-2 (up / down / left / right buttons) and the sub input button SB, the button operation (one operation) that is operated earlier is a button. Since it is processed as if there was an operation at the time of pressing, the button operation (the other operation) operated later is also valid.
(3) When the power is turned off and then returned, the music selected before the power is turned off may be restored as long as the configuration includes backup. If the configuration does not have a backup, it may be restored with a predetermined default song.
(4) When the power is turned off and then the power is restored, the liquid crystal image and the sound output are restored earlier in the liquid crystal image, but the music cannot be selected (the music may be selectable).
(5) When the power is cut off and then the power is cut off, the sound output of the liquid crystal image and the sound output is restored earlier, and the music cannot be selected (the music may be selectable).
(6) Music can be selected for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) after the power is cut off during the time reduction and then the power is restored, but the selected music is output because the sound is output when the power is restored. Not done.
(7) A music can be selected for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) after the power is cut off during the time reduction and then the power is restored, and the selected music is output together with the sound output when the power is restored.
(8) Music cannot be selected for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) after the power is cut off during the time reduction and then the power is restored, and the music can be selected after the sound output at the time of power restoration is completed. Become.
(9) A movable body accessory (movable body accessory other than the movable body accessory YK) that does not occur or does not operate in the situation where the selected music is output is provided. For example, in a situation where a music piece during a time reduction is output, a production that occurs only in a low probability and a non-time reduction (a non-probability fluctuation game state and a non-time reduction game state) is not naturally performed, and a high expectation level is obtained. It may be provided with a movable body accessory that operates only when BGM or SE (sound effect) produced by the above is output.
(10) Change in BGM in low probability and non-time saving (non-probability variable gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state) (from normal background BGM, tempai fanning BGM, reach development BGM, reach production BGM, look-ahead stage BGM, pseudo (Change to continuous BGM, etc.) is triggered by a symbol stop or a symbol (design) temporary stop, but the change in BGM during the time reduction can be performed by the player's operation.
(11) If the music is changed by the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 while the fluctuation is stopped during the time reduction (time reduction game state), the background image may be changed immediately or the next fluctuation starts. You may change it from time to time.
(12) Instead of the configuration in which the music is selected (or determined) by the operation of the cross key SB-2, the configuration in which the music is selected (or determined) by the operation of the sub-input button SB may be used.
(13) The background image (so-called effect stage, effect mode) can be changed by operating the cross key SB-2 or the sub input button SB, and the BGM corresponding to the background image may be output.

Next, FIG. 49 is an image diagram of a music selection screen during a big hit. First, the figure on the left is a music selection screen that is displayed when the jackpot start demo time ends. A character (elephant in this figure) is displayed on the left side of the middle row of the LCD screen, and a cursor indicating a plurality of songs and the selected song is displayed on the right side of the middle row of the LCD screen (music A is displayed in this figure). Hover over and selected). On the lower left of the LCD screen, a character image of "Character selection" indicating that a character can be selected and a left button and a right button indicating that the left and right buttons can be operated are displayed, and the lower center of the LCD screen is displayed. Displays a character image of "Music selection" indicating that a music can be selected, and an upper button and a lower button indicating that the up and down buttons can be operated. The music is displayed on the lower right side of the LCD screen. The character image of "OK" indicating that the decision is made and the image of the sub input button SB are displayed. In addition, on the left side of the upper part of the LCD screen, the number of rounds is displayed and during the consecutive villas (the consecutive villas are from the big hit that was won with non-probability and non-time saving to the non-probability and non-time saving again, but latent When a mode (a mode that does not notify the game state, for example, it may be configured to be a latent mode in a probabilistic and non-time saving manner) and the like, the latent mode may also be regarded as being in a continuous villa. Ending may mean returning to normal mode) Display of the total number of balls won, the text image of "Please select a song" in the upper center of the LCD screen, LCD screen An image display (right-handed display) of "→ right-handed →" indicating that the game ball should be launched is displayed on the right side of the game board (right-handed route) on the upper right side. In the case of character selection, the music display is also changed, the music corresponding to the character is moved to the cursor, and when the corresponding character is changed by changing the music, the character display is also changed. In addition, although not displayed in this figure, when the total number of acquisitions (display) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, a number that is well separated such as 5000 or 10000), it becomes "5000 OVER" or "10000 OVER". An image display or an audio (SE) output indicating that the predetermined number has been exceeded is performed. At this time, the volume of the music may be reduced, and the volume of the sound (SE) indicating that the predetermined number has been exceeded may be configured to be higher than the volume of the music (when the output of the music is completed, the volume of the music is the original. Return to). Furthermore, as a plurality of displayed songs, "???" may be displayed when there is a song that cannot be selected yet, or "???" is not displayed and a new song is added. It may be configured to display the music only in. When "???" is displayed, "???" cannot be selected, so that "???" may not match the cursor position. Specifically, in this figure, music A is currently selected, and if the down button of the cross key SB-2 is operated in this state, the music moves down one by one, so the cursor "Random" will be adjusted to the position. Here, when the down button of the cross key SB-2 is operated again, the music moves down one by one, so that "???" is adjusted to the cursor position, but "???" Since "?" Is a song that cannot be selected yet, another song in the next display order without "???" matching the cursor position (that is, the cursor jumps over "???") {for example, The cursor is positioned on the music I} in the music list (normally selected) of FIG. 52 (the cursor position is moved by two music by operating the cross key SB-2 once). The sound while the cursor is jumping over "???" may be any of the following.
(1) Cursor movement sound effect (music is not played)
(2) Play the song before "???" as it is (when you finish jumping over "???", play the next song)
(3) Silence However, for example, if "???" is continuously arranged over several songs, it takes time for the cursor to jump over, and (3) silence causes a sense of discomfort. Therefore, (1) or It is desirable to configure as in (2).

Next, the figure on the right is an LCD screen during a big hit after the music is decided. The music selection screen is erased, and the display corresponding to the selected music (or character) (in this figure, the elephant jackpot effect) is performed. As an image displayed after selecting a song, the number of remaining counts in the round (the number that can be entered in the big winning opening) is displayed as "○" in the upper center of the LCD screen, and the song is displayed in the lower part of the LCD screen. The lyrics are displayed. The display of the number of other rounds, the total number of acquisitions, and the right-handed display are continuously displayed from the music selection screen. The display of "○" indicating the remaining count number is deleted one by one each time the ball is entered into the big winning opening, and the maximum count number is displayed again in the next round. The display of the count number may be displayed only at the time of a big hit where music selection is possible, or may be displayed at the time of other big hits, and the number of rounds and the total number of acquisitions are displayed. May be displayed at any jackpot as long as it is a jackpot that can win a ball.

Next, FIG. 50 is an image diagram of a music selection screen during a short time. The upper left figure is a diagram showing a music selection screen during a fluctuating time reduction, and music I having music number 09 (“# 09”) is selected. Since the background image corresponding to the music I is a giraffe (see FIG. 52 for the correspondence between the music and the background image), the giraffe is displayed as the background image. When a new song is added due to the previous jackpot, "NEW" is displayed in the number of the newly added song ("NEW" is displayed in "# 10" in this figure), and the game The person can recognize that it is a newly added song. During the time reduction, music selection is possible regardless of whether the fluctuation is stopped or during the fluctuation, but in either case, the background image (character image) is changed at the start of the next fluctuation (FIG. 48). By referring to step 3708-14 and the like in the above), the processing can be simplified. Next, in the upper right figure, when the fluctuation time ends (here, after 5 seconds), the upper button of the cross key SB-2 is operated, and the song is changed from the number 09 song I to the number 10 song J. ing. "# 10 Music J" is displayed at the cursor position, and the display of "NEW" is erased by aligning with the cursor position. Further, since the background image corresponding to the music J is an elephant and a lion, the elephant and the lion are displayed in the background image. The display of "NEW" may not be erased just by aligning with the cursor position, but may be erased by the next big hit. Next, the lower (right) figure shows a case where a specific effect in which the background image changes during the time saving (penguins effect in this figure) occurs, and the music selection screen is erased during the specific effect. There is. However, even if the music selection screen is deleted, the music can be selected. Since the output sound is BGM corresponding to a specific effect, the volume of BGM by music selection is zero. That is, by configuring the BGM or SE corresponding to the specific production and the music selected by the music to be output on different channels, the music can be selected even during the specific production, and the selected music is released after the specific production is completed. It is configured to be able to output. The lyrics of the selected song are not displayed during the time saving. Further, although not shown, the hold display may be performed during the normal fluctuation during the time reduction, the hold display may be deleted when the specific effect occurs, and the hold display may be performed again when the specific effect ends. .. That is, even if the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 (or the first main game start port A10) during the specific effect, the second main game symbol hold display unit B21h (or the first main game symbol hold) A new hold is displayed on the display unit A21h), but the new hold is not displayed on the effect display device SG, and the effect display device SG newly displays the hold when the specific effect ends and the hold display becomes possible. The hold that entered the ball will be displayed. Furthermore, since the hold is not displayed during the specific effect, there is a possibility that the hold change effect (the color and shape of the hold display displayed on the effect display device SG may change, resulting in a big hit due to the change in the hold. There is no directing that suggests. If it is determined that the hold change is made during the specific effect, the hold change display is performed at the timing when the specific effect ends and the hold display becomes possible. Further, the hold look-ahead effect during the time reduction can be generated only for the hold related to the second main game symbol, and the hold look-ahead effect during the non-time reduction can be generated only for the hold related to the first main game symbol. It is also possible to do.

Next, FIG. 51 is a transition diagram of the liquid crystal screen when a big hit occurs during a short time. First, the upper left figure shows that the music B is selected during the time saving. Next, it becomes a big hit and moves to the upper right figure. Here, the music B is aligned with the cursor position as the music selection screen at the start of the big hit. That is, the music selected during the time reduction before the start of the big hit (music B in this figure) is displayed at the cursor position as the initial selection music on the music selection screen at the start of the big hit. Next, move to the lower left figure. Here, the music C is selected (changed from the music B to the music C) by operating the upper button of the cross key SB-2. After that, the music C is determined by operating the sub input button SB or after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 7 seconds after the operation of the up and down buttons). Next, when the big hit is finished, the figure shifts to the lower right figure. It is a liquid crystal screen at the start of the time reduction after the end of the big hit, and the music C determined during the big hit is displayed as the initial music at the start of the time reduction (that is, the music C is displayed at the cursor position). In this way, when the player selects a song during the time reduction, the music selected by the player during the time reduction is displayed at the cursor position as the initial music as the music selection screen during the big hit, and the player during the big hit When a song is selected and decided, the song decided by the player during the big hit is displayed at the cursor position as the initial song as the song selection screen during the time saving. With this configuration, it is possible to continuously output the same music during the time saving and during the big hit without changing the music selected and determined by the player on the game machine side.

Next, FIG. 52 is an example of a music list during a big hit or a short time. First, the upper music list (when selection is not possible) shows the specifications of the music output in the jackpot production where the music cannot be selected and the jackpot end demo time. In these jackpot productions, since the corresponding dedicated jackpot songs are output, it is impossible to select the music. In addition, these big hit songs cannot be selected at the time of selecting a song. At the time of the first hit (low probability and big hit from non-time saving), it is configured to be "CHALLENGE BONUS" where music selection is not possible, and the big hit of the second main game symbol (for example, music selection if the time is short). Even with the stop symbol 7B) that is possible "HYPER BONUS", it is impossible to select a musical piece. In addition, even if it is a probabilistic jackpot of the first main game symbol (for example, a jackpot by the stop symbol 7A) that has a high probability and a short time, the music cannot be selected. It is configured as. Next, the music list in the middle row (when normally selected) will be described. The music list is used when the music can be selected. That is, (1) when the jackpot effect by the second main game symbol is "HYPER BONUS" (10 round probability variation jackpot by the stop symbol 7B during the time reduction), (2) the time reduction medium (low probability and time reduction, or high probability and Time saving), either case. At the time of normal selection, the music (or music number) is displayed on the music selection screen in the order of the numbers shown in the music list. When the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated during the big hit or the time reduction, the display of the music is changed in the order of the numbers shown in the music list in accordance with the operation of the up and down buttons. Further, when the character is changed by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 on the music selection screen during the big hit, the music of the next character is selected. For example, when elephant / music A is selected as a character and the right button of the cross key SB-2 is operated, music D is selected as a lion / music as a character, and then right again. When the button is operated, Kirin is selected as the character and Music G is selected as the music. In this way, by operating the cross key SB-2 (up / down / left / right buttons), it is possible to select by character and select each song. Therefore, it is desirable that the songs at the time of song selection are grouped by character. The songs J to N are songs that can be selected when a predetermined condition (opening condition) is satisfied.

Next, the lower music list (selection order when "Random" is selected) will be described. The music list is arranged in the order in which the music is selected when "Random" is selected. After the first hit, when "Random" is selected during the big hit or during the short time, the start song is decided by lottery, and if "Random" continues to be selected after that, the song at the start of the big hit. The songs will be selected according to the order of the list. A detailed specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 53 below. In the present embodiment, the music can be selected only by the big hit (“HYPER BONUS”), which has the highest expectation of winning balls during the short time and the probability change continues, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. If the jackpot has the highest expectation of winning a ball (for example, a 10-round jackpot), the music can be selected, and if it is another jackpot (for example, a 4-round jackpot), the music cannot be selected. Well, it is also configured so that the music can be selected by the big hit (the probability fluctuates game state after the big hit), and it is difficult to get the big hit (the game toward the big winning opening). Even if you keep firing the balls, only a small number of game balls will enter the big prize opening) Big hit, the probability fluctuation game state will not be reached after the big hit ends (it will be in the non-probability fluctuation game state) Big hit, the execution time of the big hit is relatively It is also possible to configure the music selection so that it is impossible to select a song in a short time or in a big hit where the number of game balls to be paid out in a big hit is relatively small.

Next, FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of music transition. First, (a) will be described. (A) is a music transition when the player does not select a music (the cross key SB-2 or the sub input button SB is not operated). Specifically, the high-probability and time-saving rush initial music (the music output when the probability-variable game state and the time-shortening game state are reached after the big hit ends) is the mission after the first hit (CHALLENGE BONUS) ends (see FIG. 83). ), The song corresponds to the character selected by the player, and here it is the song A. Next, since the music was not selected with high probability and in a short time, the music A is still selected. Next, "Random" is selected as the initial position of the song during the big hit, and the song E is selected by the lottery of the start song related to "Random". If there is no change from the high-probability and short-time rush initial song, it is configured to be forcibly changed to "Random" at the start of the big hit. Next, the music is not changed during the big hit, the cursor remains "Random", and the music E at the initial position of the music during the big hit is still selected as the initial position of the music with high probability and short time. If there is no change in the music during the high probability and the time reduction and the next big hit occurs, the music D is selected as the initial position of the music during the big hit according to the "music list (selection order when" Omakase "is selected)" (see FIG. 52). Has been done. In other words, when "Random" is selected, the song is configured to change at the start of the big hit. Next, when the jackpot ends without changing the song during the jackpot and the time is shortened again with a high probability, the song D at the initial position of the song during the jackpot is continuously selected as the initial position of the song during the jackpot. ing. Next, the feature point (b) will be described. In (b), the music A is selected as the high-probability and time-saving initial music, and then the player selects "Random" as the music selection. At this time, a lottery for the starting song is performed in the same manner as in (a) (here, the song E is won). When a big hit occurs, the music D is selected as the initial position of the music during the big hit according to the "music list (selection order when" Omakase "is selected)" (see FIG. 52). Next, (c) will be described. In (c), the music A is selected as the high-probability and time-saving initial music, and then the music K is selected as the music selection by the player. After that, the music K continues to be selected until the player changes the music, and since the music is not changed here, the music K continues to be selected. Next, (d) will be described. In (d), the music A is selected as the high-probability and time-saving initial music, and then the music K is selected as the music selection by the player. Next, a big hit occurs, but the song K, which has been selected as a song with a high probability and a short time, is continuously selected as the initial position of the song during the big hit. Next, the song is changed and the song M is selected during the big hit. After that, the music M will continue to be selected until the player changes the music. Next, (e) will be described. In (e), the music A is selected as the high-probability and time-saving initial music, and then the music K is selected as the music selection by the player. Next, a big hit occurs, but the song K, which has been selected as a song with a high probability and a short time, is continuously selected as the initial position of the song during the big hit. Next, "Random" is selected as the music selection by the player during the big hit, and the music E is selected by the lottery of the starting music. If the music is not changed by the player, every time a big hit occurs, the next music (here) is set as the initial position of the music during the big hit according to the "music list (selection order when" Omakase "is selected)" (see FIG. 52). Then, the music D) is selected. The decision sound may be output as "picone" when the song is decided, and when the song is decided only by the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, the decision sound may be output. May be configured so that is not output. For example, during a big hit, the music is determined by operating the sub input button SB, so music A → operation of the upper button → music B (from the chorus) → operation of the sub input button SB → determination sound “picone” → music B ( The song is changed in the flow of (from the beginning), and during the time saving, the song is determined only by the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, regardless of the operation of the sub input button SB, so the song A → operation of the upper button → The music is changed in the flow of the decision sound "picone" → music B. As mentioned above, it is troublesome to output the decision sound every time the up and down buttons are operated during the time saving, so the music is decided by the operation of the up and down buttons during the time saving, but even if it is configured so that the decision sound is not output. Good.

Here, although not shown, a case where "Random" is selected (determined) multiple times during the time saving will be described (during the big hit, the music (""" is performed by operating the sub input button SB or after a predetermined time has elapsed. Since "Random" is decided), the song can be decided only once). For example, it is assumed that when "Random" is selected with high probability and in a short time, the music E is selected (determined) by the lottery of the starting music. Next, when the music is changed to another music (for example, music D) by operating the up / down buttons of the cross key SB-2, the music D is output until the music is changed again. After that, when "Random" is selected (determined) again by operating the up and down buttons of the sub input button SB, the lottery of the start music is performed at this time as well. In addition, since the jackpot start demo time and jackpot end demo time are not mentioned here, it should be added that the jackpot start demo time when the jackpot starts from a short time is selected because the jackpot introduction effect is performed. The existing music is not output. However, in the big hit end demo time, if it is a big hit that can select songs during continuous chan, the big hit end demo time is set short, the selected music continues to be output, and it will enter in a short time as it is. Become. In addition, in the promotion production that fuels whether or not the number of rounds is promoted (fuels whether the number of rounds is changed from 4 to 10), it is impossible to select a song during the promotion, and the music is played after the promotion succeeds or fails. You may be able to make a choice. From another point of view, even in the same 10-round jackpot, there is a period during which music cannot be selected for the jackpot where the promotion effect is executed, and there is no period during which music cannot be selected for the jackpot where the promotion effect is not executed. It can be said that. Furthermore, when a specific effect (an effect in which the music selection screen is erased) is executed instead of a reach effect, and the music is changed by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, the specific effect is in progress. May be configured so that the BGM dedicated to the specific effect is output, the specific effect ends, and the output of the changed music starts from the start of the next fluctuation, or the specific effect ends (from the specific effect to the normal screen). It may be configured so that the output of the changed music is started when (returns).

Next, the transition of the music and the background image in one variation during the time reduction will be described with reference to the “transition diagram of the music change and the background change during the time reduction” at the bottom of the figure. First, at the start of the fluctuation, the music A is selected, and the character A corresponding to the music A is displayed in the background image. Next, the music is changed to the music D during the fluctuation by operating the up and down buttons of the player's cross key SB-2 during the fluctuation. However, since the background image is not changed immediately, it remains the character A. Next, when it develops into the reach production, the reach production corresponding to the music A selected at the start of the fluctuation is performed, so that the BGM is also changed to the reach production BGM corresponding to the music A. That is, in the present embodiment, the reach effect corresponding to the selected music is developed, but since the reach effect is determined at the start of the fluctuation, the music is changed even if the music is changed during the fluctuation. The reach effect corresponding to the music selected at the start will be executed. Next, if the reach effect is lost, the screen returns to the normal screen during the fluctuation, but at this time, the BGM is not output (the music D may be output), and the background image is still the next fluctuation. Since there is no character A, it becomes character A. Next, when the next fluctuation starts, the music D is displayed, and the character B is also displayed as the background image. With this configuration, even if the music is changed immediately before the reach effect, the reach effect can be executed without any problem and without increasing the processing load during the fluctuation.

Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 3800 in FIG. 35. First, in step 3802, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a new hold generation command (hold information related to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) has been received from the main control board M side. To do. In the case of Yes in step 3802, in step 3804, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to the drawing hold counter (in this example, a maximum of 4 for the first main game and a maximum of 4 for the second main game). 1 ”is added (incremented). Next, in step 3806, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a hold information (particularly, a random number value related to the main game symbol lottery, for example, a win / fail lottery) based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. Random numbers / symbol lottery random numbers / variation mode lottery random numbers) are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to step 3816.

On the other hand, if No in step 3802, in step 3808, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 3808, in step 3810, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S subtracts (decrements) “1” from the drawing hold counter. Next, in step 3812, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts the hold information related to the symbol variation and the remaining hold information. Next, in step 3814, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 3816. If No in step 3808, the process proceeds to step 3816 without executing the processes of steps 381 to 3814. Next, in step 3816, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the same number of hold display lamps as the drawing hold counter value on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display unit SG12 and the second hold display unit SG13). Is lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3900).

Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 3900 in FIG. 35. First, in step 3902, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3902, in step 3904, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag. Next, in step 3906, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the variation mode of the decorative symbol and temporarily stores it in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the effect operation content determination process described later. Next, in step 3912, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 4000). Even if No in step 3902, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4000).

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the effect operation content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2550 in FIG. 55. First, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the currently set light amount level temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the referenced light amount level is “large”. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the effect operation content determination lottery table (effect table 0) based on the variation mode of the decorative symbol and the sub-side game state type. The pattern is determined by lottery, and the determined effect pattern is set in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to step 2564. On the other hand, if No in step 2554, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the referenced light amount level is “medium”. In the case of Yes in step 2558, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the effect operation content determination lottery table (effect table 1) based on the variation mode of the decorative symbol and the sub-side game state type. The pattern is determined by lottery, and the determined effect pattern is set in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to step 2564. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2558, in other words, when the light amount level is "small", in step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces an effect based on the variation mode of the decorative symbol and the sub-side game state type. The effect pattern is determined by lottery with reference to the operation content determination lottery table (effect table 2), the determined effect pattern is set in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to step 2564.

Here, FIG. 57 (effect tables 0, 1, 2) is an example of a lottery table for determining the content of the effect operation. In the following description, the case where the variation mode of the decorative symbol is "super reach" is illustrated, but the same applies to the variation mode of other decorative symbols. First, as shown in this example, the effect pattern in the present embodiment includes the execution content related to the effect operation such as the effect image reproduction timing, the movable body accessory drive timing, and the illumination lamp lighting / blinking timing. It is specified as. Then, the specified effect operation is executed based on the effect pattern determined based on the random number value acquired at an arbitrary timing. For example, when the variation mode of the decorative symbol is "super reach" and the acquired random number value is "100", the effect pattern "effect A-5" is determined. Then, based on the effect pattern "effect A-5", at the start of the change of the decorative pattern, the "effect image A-5" (for example, a series of moving images for enhancing the interest of the change of the decorative pattern, which is a so-called reach effect. (The image can be mentioned) is started to play, and 30 seconds after the start of the decorative symbol change, the operation of the "illuminated lamp (in this example, the game effect lamp D26)" is started, and after the start of the decorative symbol change. After 55 seconds, the operation of the "movable body accessory (in this example, the movable body accessory YK)" is started. Here, each effect pattern in the present embodiment can be mainly classified into three types based on the design intention of the effect pattern (hereinafter, such a classification is referred to as an effect system).

First, the first type is "effect system A (or called base effect)", and the effect patterns classified into the type are the main effect patterns in the pachinko gaming machine. Here, the main production pattern means a production pattern that influences the interest of the production of the pachinko game machine, and more specifically, for example, the selection rate at the time of loss and the selection rate at the time of big hit. An example can be given in which both are configured to be high (in other words, the production pattern is the main route to the big hit). When designing such an effect pattern, in order to pursue the improvement of the entertainment related to the effect, generally, the timing of driving the movable body accessory, the timing of lighting / blinking the illumination lamp, or the disturbance assigned to the effect pattern It takes a lot of time to design the numerical range.

Next, the second type is "production system B (or called a character-based production)", and the production pattern classified into the type is a production pattern that notifies the player that the jackpot expectation is high. It becomes. In addition, since it is designed with the intention of notifying that the jackpot expectation is high, it is designed so that the timing of driving the movable body accessory and the timing of lighting / blinking the illumination lamp are relatively large compared to other classifications. It will be. In addition, since the design is made so that the expectation of a big hit is high, the selection rate at the time of loss is extremely low, and the selection rate at the time of hit may be high.

Next, the third type is "production system C (or called an illumination-based production)", and the production patterns classified into the type are production patterns that complement the production systems A and B. .. In addition, since it is designed to serve as a complement to the production systems A and B, the timing of driving the moving object and the timing of lighting / blinking the illumination lamp are relatively smaller than those of the production systems A and B. It will be designed. Regarding the degree of expectation of a big hit, the selection rate at the time of loss may be high, and the selection rate at the time of hit may be extremely low.

In this embodiment, in addition to the "directing systems A to C", the "directing system D" is further provided. Then, when the light amount level is "medium" or "small", the effect pattern classified into the "effect system D" can be selected, and the effect pattern is classified into the "effect system D". The production pattern is the production pattern with the lowest power consumption.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart of FIG. 56, next, in step 2564, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect image reproduction timing, the movable body accessory operation timing, and the illumination lamp lighting based on the determined effect pattern. Blinking operation timing (in this example, only the three types of timings are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, voice reproduction timing, so-called sub-input button pressing timing, etc. may be included), and The execution content (in the case of an effect image, for example, the image reproduction content of "effect image A-5") is temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3912). To do.

Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 4000 in FIG. 35. First, in step 4002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 4002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag in step 4004. Next, in step 4006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol changing flag. Next, in step 4009, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S starts the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 4010. On the other hand, even if No in step 4002, the process proceeds to step 4010.

Next, in step 4010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4010, in step 4011, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S confirms the timer value of the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 4012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the variation start timing of the decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 4012, in step 4014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a variation display command of the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). , Step 4026.

On the other hand, if No in step 4012, in step 4016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 4016, in step 4018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side. Is sent to), and the process proceeds to step 4026.

On the other hand, if No in step 4016, in step 4020, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has reached the notice image or reach image display timing based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 4020, in step 4022, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets an image display command related to the timing (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Then, the process proceeds to step 4026. On the other hand, even if No in step 4020, the process proceeds to step 4026.

Next, in step 4026, the CPUSC of the sub control board S operates the sub input button SB or the lever SB-3 while the fluctuation is the button effect execution fluctuation {in this example, the main game symbol is fluctuating. The symbol variation in which the effect (button effect) in which the advance notice effect can be executed is executed is called "button effect execution variation", and is a part of the symbol variation in which the fluctuation time related to the main game symbol is 60 seconds. Is a button effect execution fluctuation}. Although the details will be described later, the button effects according to the present embodiment include a single push button effect, a continuous push button effect, a long press button effect, and a hidden button effect. In the case of Yes in step 4026, in step 2650, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the button effect execution process described later, and proceeds to step 4028. On the other hand, even if No in step 4026, the process proceeds to step 4028. Next, in step 4028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the operation timing of the movable body accessory YK has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 4028, in step 4030, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts driving the movable body accessory YK based on a predetermined operation content, and proceeds to step 4032. On the other hand, even if No in step 4028, the process proceeds to step 4032. Next, in step 4032, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the operation timing of the illumination lamp has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 4032, in step 4034, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the illumination operation permission flag for production (the flag used in the illumination lamp operation control process of FIG. 68), and proceeds to step 4036. To do. On the other hand, even if No in step 4032, the process proceeds to step 4036.

Next, in step 4036, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol has stopped. In the case of Yes in step 4036, in step 4038, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a stop display command (confirmation display command) for the decorative symbol (transmits to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Will be). Next, in step 4040, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the drawing fluctuation time timer and resets (zero clears) it. Next, in step 4042, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the effect execution operation flag. Next, in step 4044, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol changing flag. Next, in step 4046, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a hold. In the case of Yes in step 4046, in step 4048, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets (zero clears) the non-game period measurement timer HY10t (increment timer) to start, and shifts to the next process (process in step 2900). To do. Even if No in step 4010, step 4036, or step 4046, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2900). As described above, in the present embodiment, it is configured to determine that the non-game period has started when the main game symbol is stopped and the hold does not exist.

Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the button effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2650 in FIG. 58. First, in step 2652, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the effect executed by the symbol variation is a single button pressing effect or a lever effect. In the case of Yes in step 2652, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the single-shot push effect execution process described later in step 4300, and shifts to the next process (process of step 4028). On the other hand, if No in step 2652, in step 2654, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the effect executed by the variation is the button repeated press effect. In the case of Yes in step 2654, in step 2750, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the continuous hitting effect execution process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 4028).

On the other hand, if No in step 2654, in step 2656, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the effect executed by the fluctuation is the button long press effect. In the case of Yes in step 2656, in step 2800, the long press effect execution process described later is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028). On the other hand, if No in step 2656, in step 2658, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the effect executed by the variation is a hidden button effect. In the case of Yes in step 2658, in step 2850, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the hidden button effect execution process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028). Further, even if No in step 2658, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028).

Next, FIG. 60 shows a single-shot push effect execution process {button single-shot effect (effect of pressing the sub-input button SB single-shot) and lever effect (effect of pulling the lever single-shot) according to the subroutine of step 4300 in FIG. 59. However, this process is executed when it is executed. } Is a flowchart. When the button single-shot effect is executed, the process excluding the parentheses is executed (for example, in step 4302, it is determined whether or not the button is valid), and when the lever single-shot pull effect is executed, the parentheses are executed. It is configured to execute the process described in (for example, in step 4302, it is determined whether or not the lever is valid). First, in step 4302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the button is valid (or the lever is valid). In the case of Yes in step 4302, in step 4304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a single-shot button image (or lever image). Next, in step 4306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the automatic button flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 4306, in step 4308, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB (or the lever SB-3) has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 4308, in step 4310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed single-shot button image (or lever image), executes a cut-in effect, and performs the next process (step 4028). Process). The cut-in effect (cut-in image) is an effect that suggests a jackpot expectation of a symbol fluctuation during execution that is displayed for a short time, and is displayed on the front layer rather than the display of the decorative symbol (see FIG. 65). ). In addition, there are multiple types of cut-in effects, and the jackpot expectation differs depending on the type (for example, the background color is "red" → jackpot expectation "large", the background color is "yellow" → jackpot expectation "medium". , The background color is "blue" → the jackpot expectation is "small", etc.).

On the other hand, if No in step 4308, in step 4312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the button valid period (or lever valid period) has expired. In the case of Yes in step 4312, in step 4314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed single-shot button image (or lever image), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028).

If No in step 4306, in step 4316, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB (or lever SB-3) has been operated. If Yes in step 4316, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the automatic button flag in step 4318. Next, in step 4320, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed single-shot button image (or lever image), executes a cut-in effect, and performs the next process (process of step 4028). Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 4316, in step 4322, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the single-shot button valid period has expired. In the case of Yes in step 4322, in step 4324, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed single-shot button image (or lever image), executes a cut-in effect, and performs the next process (step 4028). Process). In addition, even if No in step 4302, step 4312, or step 4322, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028). In this way, when the automatic button flag is on, the cut-in effect is executed at the timing when the button validity period ends, that is, the sub-input button SB is operated at the timing when the button validity period ends. It is configured to perform the same processing (also referred to as executing an automatic button operation). The automatic button operation execution timing in the single button press effect is not limited to this. For example, when the button valid period is 5 seconds, the automatic button operation execution timing is 3 seconds after the start of the valid period. It may be configured to do so.

Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the continuous hitting effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2750 in FIG. 59. First, in step 2752, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the button is valid. In the case of Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a continuous hit button image (an image prompting the player to repeatedly hit the sub input button). Next, in step 2756, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the automatic button flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2756, in step 2758, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 2758, in step 2760, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a button continuous striking effect (an effect executed by repeatedly striking the sub-input button SB, for example, every time the sub-input button SB is operated. The effect is generated in), and the process proceeds to step 2762. On the other hand, in the case of No in 2758, the process proceeds to step 2762.

Next, in step 2762, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the button repeated hitting effect has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during the button validity period. In the case of Yes in step 2762, in step 2764, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed continuous hit button image, executes a cut-in effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028). .. On the other hand, if No in step 2762, in step 2766, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the button validity period has expired. In the case of Yes in step 2766, in step 2768, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed continuous hit button image, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028).

If No in step 2756, that is, if the automatic button flag is on, in step 2770, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. If Yes in step 2770, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the automatic button flag in step 2772. Next, in step 2774, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the button repeated pressing effect, and proceeds to step 2780. On the other hand, if No in step 2770, in step 2776, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the button valid period. In the case of Yes in step 2776, in step 2778, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a button repeated striking effect every predetermined time (0.1 seconds in this example) (when the automatic button flag is on). , From the timing when 0.5 seconds have passed from the start of the button validity period, the button repeated hitting effect is executed once every 0.1 seconds), and the process proceeds to step 2780. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the automatic button flag is on, the button repeated hitting effect (button repeated hitting that does not require the operation of the player's sub-input button) is performed 0.5 seconds after the start of the button validity period. Production) is executed at 0.1 second intervals. Further, the situation where the automatic button flag is on and the button is valid (or the automatic button flag is on and the button is valid, and the player does not operate the sub-input button SB). When the player operates the sub-input button SB in the situation where the button repeated hitting effect is executed), the automatic button flag is turned off, and the player operates the sub-input button SB in the subsequent button repeated hitting effect. It will be executed by.

Next, in step 2780, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the button repeated hitting effect has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during the button validity period. In the case of Yes in step 2780, in step 2782, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed continuous hit button image, executes a cut-in effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028). .. On the other hand, if No in step 2780, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2784 whether or not the button validity period has expired. In the case of Yes in step 2784, in step 2786, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed repeated button image without executing the cut-in effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028). .. In addition, even if No in step 2752, step 2776, step 2784, or step 2766, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028). In this example, as an effect mode of the button repeated hitting effect, the cut-in effect is displayed when the sub-input button SB is operated a predetermined number of times during the button validity period, but this is limited to this. Instead, for example, the meter is displayed as a continuous hit button image, and each time the sub input button SB is operated during the button validity period, the lighting display of the meter increases as a button continuous hit effect, and the subs of a predetermined number of times during the button validity period. When the input button SB is operated, the lighting display of the meter becomes full, and then the cut-in effect may be displayed (so-called progressive button repeated press effect). In addition, it may be configured to display how much the lighting display of the current meter has increased when the sub-input button SB is operated a predetermined number of times during the button validity period without executing the cut-in effect. .. In such a configuration, the more the meter is lit, the higher the expectation of a big hit of the symbol variation may be.

Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the long press effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2800 in FIG. 59. In step 2802, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the button is valid. In the case of Yes in step 2802, in step 2804, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a long-press button image (an image prompting the player to press and hold the sub-input button). Next, in step 2806, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the automatic button flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2806, in step 2808, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB is operated. In the case of Yes in step 2808, in step 2810, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S presses and holds the button (an effect executed by pressing and holding the sub-input button SB, for example, pressing the sub-input button SB. The effect is generated while doing so), and the process proceeds to step 2812. On the other hand, even if No in step 2808, the process proceeds to step 2812.

Next, in step 2812, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the button long-pressing effect for a predetermined time has been executed during the button validity period. In the case of Yes in step 2812, in step 2814, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed long-press button image, executes a cut-in effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028). To do. On the other hand, if No in step 2812, in step 2816, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the button validity period has expired. In the case of Yes in step 2816, in step 2818, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed long push button image and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028).

If No in step 2806, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2820 whether or not the sub-input button SB is being operated. In the case of Yes in step 2820, in step 2822, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the automatic button flag. Next, in step 2824, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the button long press effect, and proceeds to step 2830. On the other hand, if No in step 2820, in step 2826, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the button valid period. In the case of Yes in step 2826, in step 2828, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the button long press effect (when the automatic button flag is on, from the timing when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the button validity period. The button long press effect will be executed), and the process proceeds to step 2830.

Next, in step 2830, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the button long-pressing effect for a predetermined time has been executed during the button validity period. In the case of Yes in step 2830, in step 2832, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed long-press button image, executes a cut-in effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028). To do. On the other hand, if No in step 2830, in step 2834, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the button validity period has expired. In the case of Yes in step 2834, in step 2836, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the long-press button image displayed without executing the cut-in effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028). To do. In addition, even if No in step 2802, step 2826, step 2834, or step 2816, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028). In this example, as an effect mode of the button long press effect, the cut-in effect is displayed when the operation of the sub-input button SB is maintained for a predetermined time during the button validity period. Is not limited, for example, the meter is displayed as a long-press button image, the operation of the sub-input button SB is maintained during the button validity period, and the meter is lit and displayed as a button long-press effect each time the maintenance time elapses. May increase, and when the sub-input button SB is pressed and held for a predetermined time during the button validity period, the lighting display of the meter becomes full, and then the cut-in effect may be displayed ( So-called progressive button long press production). Even if the cut-in effect is not executed and the sub-input button SB is pressed and held for a predetermined time during the button validity period, the current meter lighting display is increased to be displayed. Good. In such a configuration, the more the meter is lit, the higher the expectation of a big hit of the symbol variation may be.

Next, FIG. 63 is an execution image diagram of an automatic button operation in the game machine according to the present embodiment. First, the upper part of the figure shows the timing at which the automatic button operation can be executed when the single button pressing effect is executed (in this example, the case where the fluctuation time is 60 seconds is illustrated). Specifically, the button validity period and button automatic input (by turning on the automatic button flag, a cut-in effect, a button repeated press effect, etc. are executed without operating the sub input button SB, etc., in the symbol variation of 60 seconds. This is sometimes called button auto-filling) to indicate the timing of execution. At the time of executing the single button pressing effect, the automatic button input is executed at the timing when the button validity period ends. The timing at which the automatic button input is executed is not limited to this, and may be configured to be executed at a timing during the button validity period, for example.

Next, the lower part of FIG. 63 is an action diagram showing the timing at which the button automatic input can be executed in the case of the button continuous press effect or the button long press effect. In the case of the button repeated press effect or the button long press effect, the button automatic input is configured to be executed every 0.1 seconds from the timing 0.5 seconds after the button validity period is started. .. With this configuration, the button continuous press effect or the button long press effect has an earlier execution timing of the button automatic input for the button validity period than the button single press effect, and the symbol variation period. It is configured to delay the button validity period. In this example, the timing at which the button automatic input is executed due to the symbol variation in which the button repeated press effect and the button long press effect are executed is set to 0.5 seconds after the button validity period is started. , Not limited to this, for example, the jackpot expectation is higher when the button long press effect is executed than when the button continuous press effect is executed, and the button automatic input related to the button continuous press effect is performed. The timing may be 0.5 seconds after the button valid period is started, and the button automatic input timing related to the button long press effect may be the timing when the button valid period is started. Further, the button valid period related to the button long press effect may be configured so that the button effective period relative to the symbol variation period is later than the button valid period related to the button continuous press effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation of the symbol variation in which the button continuous press effect or the button long press effect is executed is higher than the jackpot expectation of the symbol variation in which the single button press effect is executed. Has been done. That is, the button continuous press effect with a high jackpot expectation or the button long press effect has a later button validity period for the symbol variation period than the button single press effect with a low jackpot expectation, and the button is automatically activated during the button validity period. The input execution timing will be earlier.

In addition, even if the same button is pressed once, the automatic input timing (the same effect as when the sub input button SB is operated without operating the sub input button SB = cut-in effect) according to the high or low degree of expectation of big hit. May be configured to be different. Specifically, after the start of reach, the dialogue notice (notice effect with relatively low expectation of big hit) is executed by pressing the sub input button SB once during the button validity period before the start of reach. When the cut-in effect (notice effect with relatively high expectation of big hit) is executed by pressing the sub input button SB once during the button validity period, the automatic input timing is later in the button validity period. (It may be the previous timing, and the automatic input timing in the button validity period may be different due to the difference in the jackpot expectation). Further, such a configuration is not limited to the single button pressing effect, and may be applied to a button continuous pressing effect, a button long pressing effect, a lever effect, and a hidden button effect. Further, even in the same single button pressing effect, the earlier the start timing of the button valid period is, the later the automatic input timing in the button valid period is later (the timing may be earlier, and the start timing of the button valid period is different. The automatic input timing in the button validity period may be different depending on the button.) Further, such a configuration is not limited to the single button pressing effect, and may be applied to a button continuous pressing effect, a button long pressing effect, a lever effect, and a hidden button effect.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the hidden button effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2850 in FIG. 59. First, in step 2852, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S operates the sub-input button SB by a symbol variation that executes a button validity period (single button press effect, button repeated press effect, button long press effect, or hidden button effect). It is determined whether or not the period for accepting the effect = the period during which the effect is executed by operating the sub input button SB). In the case of Yes in step 2852, in step 2854, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 2854, in step 2856, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the button repeated pressing effect. Next, in step 2858, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a continuous hit button image, and the process proceeds to step 2860. On the other hand, even if No in step 2854, the process proceeds to step 2860. In this way, the image prompting the player to repeatedly hit the sub-input button SB is not displayed when the hidden button effect is executed, but the image of the repeated hit button is displayed when the player operates the sub-input button SB during the button validity period. At the same time, the button repeated hitting effect will be executed. More specifically, when the player operates the sub-input button SB during the button validity period, the meter is displayed as a continuous hit button image, and the lit meter is increased as the button continuous hit effect. The Rukoto.

Next, in step 2860, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the repeated hit button image is displayed. In the case of Yes in step 2860, in step 2862, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the button repeated hitting effect has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during the button valid period. In the case of Yes in step 2862, in step 2864, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed continuous hit button image and displays the lever image. Next, in step 2866, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the lever enable flag and proceeds to the process of step 2872.

On the other hand, if No in step 2860 or step 2862, in step 2868, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the button validity period has expired. In the case of Yes in step 2868, in step 2870, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed continuous hit button image (if the continuous hit button image is not displayed, the process is not executed), and step 2872. Move to. In addition, even if No in step 2852 or step 2868, the process proceeds to step 2872.

Next, in step 2872, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the lever enable flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2872, in step 2874, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the lever SB-3 has been operated during the lever valid period. In the case of Yes in step 2874, in step 2876, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed lever image, executes a cut-in effect, and proceeds to step 2880. On the other hand, in step 2874, if No, in step 2878, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the lever valid period has expired. If Yes in step 2878, the process proceeds to step 2880. Next, in step 2880, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the lever enable flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 4028). Even if No in step 2872 or 2878, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028). In this embodiment, the automatic button flag is not switched on / off even if the sub-input button SB is operated during the symbol variation for executing the hidden button effect. With this configuration, for example, in a situation where the automatic button flag is on, when the player operates the sub input button SB to make the meter appear as a hidden button effect, the automatic button flag is turned off. It is possible to prevent an event that is different from the player's intention from occurring. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, in the symbol variation for executing the hidden button effect, the automatic button operation is not executed even if the automatic button flag is turned on, that is, the player himself / herself. Unless the sub-input button SB is operated, the display of the continuous hit button image and the button repeated hit effect are not executed.

Next, FIG. 65 is an example of a hidden button effect image diagram in the game machine according to this example. First, the super reach effect is started in a certain symbol variation, and the effect display of the button image is not displayed. Next, when the sub-input button SB is pressed while the button image is not displayed, a display that prompts the player to perform a continuous striking operation together with a continuous striking effect (which is a meter display) as a hidden button effect (in this example). "Strike repeatedly !!" is displayed). Next, the sub-input button SB is repeatedly pressed, and the meter becomes full by pressing the sub-input button SB a predetermined number of times. Next, by pressing the sub input button SB a predetermined number of times, the meter display is erased, a lever image is displayed, and a display prompting the player to operate the lever (in this example, "pull the lever !!" Display) is displayed. After that, by operating the lever SB-3, the cut-in image is displayed on the effect display device SG, and the jackpot symbol is stopped as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. As described above, even if the automatic button flag is turned on when the hidden button effect is executed, the button automatic input is not executed, that is, unless the player repeatedly presses the sub input button SB by himself / herself, the meter and lever images , The cut-in effect will not be displayed. The execution mode of the hidden button effect is not limited to the mode shown in the figure, for example.
(1) When the reach effect is started and the button image is not displayed, the meter is displayed by repeatedly pressing the sub input button SB.
(2) After that, the sub-input button SB was repeatedly pressed to fill up the lighting display of the meter, so that the display "Preparing for lever production" was displayed large (to occupy more than half of the display area SG10). Display),
(3) After that, the display "Preparing for lever production" becomes smaller and moves to the lower right of the display area SG10.
(4) After that, as an effect of executing a single button press or lever operation at the end of the reach effect, a winning branch effect {an effect that suggests the expectation of a big hit of the symbol change during execution, for example, "press the button to complete the character. By executing the display of "Let's do it!", Cut-in effect, single-shot button push or single-pull lever, specific symbols that are not numbers are aligned, and by executing single-push button or single-pull lever, the jackpot symbol stops ( Temporary stop) (or not aligned), etc.} is executed.
(5) When prompting the lever operation in the winning branch effect, "Lever preparing" is displayed large again, and then the "Lever preparing" display is deleted and the lever image is displayed. (When executing the winning branch effect, it is preferable to configure so that the jackpot expectation of the symbol fluctuation during execution is higher when the lever image is displayed than when the button image is displayed. , When the button image is displayed, the operation of the sub input button SB is urged, and when the lever image is displayed, the operation of the lever SB-3 is urged).
(6) When the winning branch effect is an effect of operating the lever SB-3 and the cut-in effect is executed by operating the lever SB-3, the jackpot expectation level among a plurality of cut-in effects exists. If the cut-in effect with the lowest is not executed, or if the cut-in effect with the lowest expectation of big hit is executed among multiple cut-in effects, it is certain that the symbol fluctuation during execution will be a big hit. It may be configured to be.
(7) There are multiple types of button images (and lever images) in the winning branch effect (for example, multiple types of display colors) (the jackpot expectation differs depending on the type of button image), and the button validity period (and When an indicator display suggesting (lever validity period) is displayed, the indicator display also corresponds to the type of button image (and lever image) {for example, the button display is "blue", "red", " The expectation of a big hit of the symbol fluctuation during execution increases in the order of "Kirin pattern" and "Rainbow"("Rainbow" is a big hit confirmed), and the color of the indicator (display suggesting the button validity period or lever validity period) is also It may be "blue", "red", "Kirin pattern", or "rainbow" according to the color of the button display}. The indicator has a "bar" shape in which the display portion becomes shorter as the button validity period (or lever validity period) elapses, and the display portion of the "bar" is the button validity period (or the lever validity period). It suggests the remaining time of the lever validity period). In addition, what color is the effect (the effect mode in which the light gathers and the button appears) immediately before the button image (and lever image) appears {"blue", "red", "kirin pattern", "rainbow" in that order? Depending on whether the jackpot expectation of the symbol change during execution is increasing (“rainbow” is the jackpot confirmed)}, the expectation and execution of which type of button image (and lever image) is displayed. The jackpot expectation of the symbol fluctuation inside is different.
It may be configured as described above.

Next, FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2900 in FIG. 35. First, in step 2902, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game in-game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2904, in step 2912, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the special gaming flag. Next, in step 2914, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S issues a command related to the jackpot start display on the effect display device SG (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Set (perform as appropriate based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 2915, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the special in-game effect mode in the sub-side game state type, and proceeds to step 2916. Even if No in step 2902, the process proceeds to step 2916. Next, in step 2916, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of rounds and the number of winnings (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). To do.

Next, in step 2926, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2926, in step 2928, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command related to the jackpot end display (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). .. Next, in step 2930, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the special game in-game flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 4400). Even if No in step 2904 or step 2926, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4400).

Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the background image display process according to the subroutine of step 4400 in FIG. 35. First, in step 4402, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state has shifted from the non-time-shortening gaming state to the time-shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 4402, in step 4404, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the time saving effect mode to the sub side game state type. Next, in step 4406, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the background image for the time saving effect mode on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4500). On the other hand, if No in step 4402, in step 4408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state has shifted from the time-shortening gaming state to the non-time-shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 4408, in step 4410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the normal effect mode as the sub-side game state type. Next, in step 4412, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the background image for the normal effect mode on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4500). Even if No in step 4408, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4500).

Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the illumination lamp operation control process according to the subroutine of step 4500 in FIG. 35. In step 4502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not an error neglect instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 4502, in step 4504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S acquires the type of error that occurred (in this example, a door opening error, a saucer full tank error, a vibration detection error, or an illegal radio wave detection error). To do. Next, in step 4510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness based on the type of error and the current light intensity level (large / medium / small in this example) (illumination table 1). The determined contents are temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub-control board S together with (see). Next, in step 4512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the error illumination operation flag, and proceeds to step 4514. Even if No in step 4502, the process proceeds to step 4514.

Next, in step 4514, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the error illumination operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4514, in step 4516, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a predetermined illumination lamp (for example, based on the lighting pattern and lighting brightness temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub-control board S). , A predetermined portion of the game effect lamp D26) is lit. Next, in step 4518, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not an error neglect release command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 4518, in step 4520, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the error illumination operation flag and proceeds to step 4522. In addition, even if No in step 4514 or step 4518, the process proceeds to step 4522.

Next, in step 4522, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the error illumination operation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 4522, in step 4524, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the effect lighting operation permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4524, in step 4526, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the effect illumination operation permission flag. Next, in step 4528, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness based on the effect system and the current light intensity level (see the illumination table 2), and the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Temporarily store (set) in. Next, in step 4530, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the effect illumination operation flag, and proceeds to step 4532. On the other hand, even if No in step 4524, the process proceeds to step 4532.

Next, in step 4532, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the effect lighting operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4532, in step 4534, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S operates the lighting operation of the predetermined illumination lamp based on the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. To execute. Next, in step 4536, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not all the scheduled lighting operations have been completed. In the case of Yes in step 4536, in step 4538, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the effect illumination operation flag and shifts to the next process (process in step 3250).

If No in step 4532, in step 4540, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the effect execution operation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 4540, in step 4542, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness based on the current sub-side game state type and light intensity level (see the illumination table 3). The determined contents are temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, at 4544, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a predetermined lighting operation of the illumination lamp based on the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. (Processing in step 3250). In addition, even when No in step 4522, step 4536, or step 4540, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3250).

Next, FIG. 69 is an example of a reference table for determining the lighting pattern of the illuminated lamp according to this example. First, the illumination table 1 is an illumination table that is referred to when an error occurs. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the lighting pattern of the illumination lamp is configured such that the lighting period → the extinguishing period is one cycle, and the one cycle is repeated a predetermined number of times (including the case where there is no limit on the number of times). There is. Further, the brightness of the illuminated lamp during the lighting period is determined based on any of a predetermined number of steps (10 steps in this example) (in this example, the brightness of the illuminated lamp is 1 <brightness. The brightness is 2 << ... <the brightness increases in the order of 10). The lighting pattern and brightness of the illumination lamp are configured to differ depending on the type of error and the current light intensity level. In this example, the lighting brightness (and lighting pattern) of the illumination lamp can be different depending on the set light amount level even when an error occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this and is set when an error occurs. The illumination lamp may be lit at a constant lighting brightness (and lighting pattern) regardless of the light intensity level.

Next, the illumination table 2 is an illumination table that is referred to during the effect operation. As shown in this example, the configuration related to the lighting pattern and the brightness of the illumination lamp is the same as the configuration in the illumination table 1. Further, the lighting pattern and the brightness of the illumination lamp are configured to be different for each effect system and the current light intensity level.

Next, the illumination table 3 is an illumination table that is referred to when the game state is notified. As shown in this example, the configuration related to the lighting pattern and the brightness of the illumination lamp is the same as the configuration in the illumination table 1. Further, the lighting pattern and the brightness of the illumination lamp are configured to be different for each sub-side gaming state type and the current light intensity level.

In the present embodiment, the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness of the illumination lamp may be different due to the difference in the light amount level, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the light amount level is different. The lighting patterns of the illuminated lamps may not be different, and only the lighting brightness of the illuminated lamps may be different. Further, in the present embodiment, the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness of the illuminated lamp at the time of error occurrence may be different due to the difference in the light amount level, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when an error occurs, the lighting pattern may be different. May be configured to determine the lighting pattern and lighting brightness of the illuminated lamp based only on the type of error that has occurred, regardless of the amount of light level, or when an error occurs regardless of the type of error that has occurred. The lighting pattern of the illuminated lamp may always be a predetermined pattern, and the lighting brightness of the illuminated lamp may be set to a predetermined brightness.

Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the volume control process according to the subroutine of step 3250 in FIG. 35. First, in step 3252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the volume determination timing (for example, when the jackpot starts, when the fluctuation starts, when the standby demo screen starts, when the volume switch change is determined, or when the volume level change is determined, etc. ) Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3252, in step 3254, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not an error notification instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 3254, in step 3256, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S acquires the type of error that has occurred. Next, in step 3258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the volume based on the type of error and the volume switch status (see the volume determination table at the time of error), and determines the determined contents in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Is temporarily stored (set) in, and the process proceeds to step 3262.

On the other hand, if No in step 3254, in step 3260, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the output volume based on the volume switch status and the determined volume level (see the non-error volume determination table). , The determined content is temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to step 3262. Even if No in step 3252, the process proceeds to step 3262. Next, in step 3262, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S outputs a sound based on the determined (set) volume, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999).

Next, FIG. 71 (non-error volume determination table) is an example of a table for determining the volume output from the gaming machine at the time of non-error in the gaming machine according to this example. The volume level according to this example is set in five stages of level 1 to level 5, and can be set by the player determining the volume level. Further, the volume switch is set in three stages of large, medium, and small, and is configured so that only the administrator can set it (for example, it cannot be changed unless the door D18 is opened, etc.). In this example, the maximum volume (dB) output from the game machine is determined by the volume level and the volume switch. For example, when the volume level is set to "level 3" and the volume switch is set to "medium", the maximum output volume dB is "95 dB". When the volume switch is "low" and the volume level is "level 1" or "level 2", or in the demo screen mode, the volume is fixed at the lowest volume value "1". To. In addition, when the volume switch is "loud" and when the volume switch is "medium", the volume corresponding to the volume level is the same (when the volume level is the same, the volume is the same). There is). With this configuration, the volume differs depending on the type of output sound, so the maximum volume value should be the same, and only the minimum volume value (volume level 1 and volume level 2 when the volume switch is "low"). ) Can be adjusted so that the volume level does not vary depending on the production number.

Next, FIG. 71 (error-time volume determination table) is an example of a table for determining the volume output from the game machine at the time of error in the game machine according to this example. The volume at the time of an error is configured so that the player cannot set it (so that it is determined regardless of the volume level), and only the administrator can set it with the volume switch. The horizontal axis shows the mode of the error (in this example, the door open error, the saucer full tank error, the vibration detection error, and the illegal radio wave detection error are exemplified), and the error type on the horizontal axis is shown. And the volume switch on the vertical axis are configured to determine the maximum volume (dB) output from the game machine. For example, when the error type is "vibration detection error" and the volume switch is set to "small", the maximum output volume dB is "78 dB". Since the fraudulent radio wave detection error is a high-risk error, it is always fixed at the maximum volume of "95 dB" regardless of not only the volume level but also the setting of the volume switch. With this configuration, the volume level for notifying the error of the game machine cannot be customized by the player, and the maximum volume is always set for the fraudulent radio wave detection error, which is a high-risk error. It is configured to be output with. In the present embodiment, the volume at the time of error occurrence is configured to be determined based on the type of error that has occurred and the status of the volume switch, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the volume is not limited to the status of the volume switch. , It may be configured to differ only depending on the type of error that has occurred, or it may be configured to always have the maximum volume when an error occurs, regardless of the status of the volume switch and the type of error that has occurred.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the player can operate the operating member without operating the operating member (sub-input button SB, cross key SB-2, lever SB-3). It is configured so that the same effect as when it is performed (automatic button input is executed), and the setting related to the volume, the setting related to the amount of light, and the automatic button operation setting can be changed. In addition, as a mode for changing the light amount setting and the automatic button operation setting, an element that can be changed by the player and an element that can be changed only by the administrator are provided, and a situation that can be changed or a situation that cannot be changed (button effect). It is user-friendly and entertaining, as it is possible to customize the game machine according to the player's taste without impairing the game playability by providing situations (medium, etc.) and different changing methods (during non-game and during game). It can be a high-quality gaming machine.

(Example 1 of change from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, when the button effect is executed, it is possible to execute the automatic button setting in which the same effect as when the player operates the operation member is executed without operating the operation member. However, the operation mode of the operation member related to the button effect is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration to which the operation mode of the operation member at the time of executing the button effect different from the present embodiment is applied as an example of change 1 from the present embodiment will be described in detail below only for the changes from the present embodiment.

First, FIG. 72 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the first modification from the present embodiment. The change from the present embodiment is step 3500 (variant 1), that is, after executing the volume control process in step 3250, in step 3500 (variant 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S will be described later. The right-handed instruction display control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2999.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the non-gaming period control process according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. 72 in the first modification from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are in step 2166 (variant 1) and step 2168 (variant 1), that is, in step 2166 (variant 1) if no new main game hold has occurred in step 2156. The CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a new auxiliary game hold has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 2166 (variation 1), the non-game period measurement timer HY10t is stopped and reset in step 2168 (variation 1), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3600). Even if No in step 2162 (variation 1), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3600). As described above, in the change example 1 from the present embodiment, the case where the operation of the firing handle D44 is detected, the case where the symbol change starts, the case where the main game hold newly occurs, and the case where the auxiliary game hold is newly generated. It is determined that the non-game period has ended and the non-game period measurement timer HY10t is reset. However, when the non-game period measurement timer HY10t is reset, the design changes when the operation of the firing handle D44 is detected. The display of the standby demo screen, the first customization guidance screen, the second customization guidance screen, the customization in progress screen, the light amount adjustment screen, and the volume adjustment screen is displayed depending on whether the game is started or a new main game hold occurs. On the other hand, if a new auxiliary game hold occurs, the display of the standby demo screen, the first customization guidance screen, the second customization guidance screen, the customization in progress screen, the light amount adjustment screen, and the volume adjustment screen will not be deleted. It is configured. In addition, in the change example 1 from this embodiment, the condition for shifting to the standby demo screen is that the non-game period measurement timer value is equal to or higher than the demo start value (240 seconds), and the non-game period measurement timer Value measurement starts = The non-game period starts when the game machine customization setting is changed (determined) and when the symbol fluctuation stops and the main game hold does not exist. There is. The conditions for resetting the non-game period measurement timer value are that the symbol change has started, the operation of the firing handle D44 has been detected, the main game hold has occurred, or the auxiliary game hold has occurred (auxiliary game start port H10). It may be that the game ball has passed). In addition, the conditions for ending the display of the standby demo screen are two or more of the detection of the operation of the launch handle D44, the start of the symbol change, the occurrence of the main game hold, and the occurrence of the auxiliary game hold shown in the figure. May be a condition that is satisfied, and in such a case, it is preferable that the two or more conditions that are satisfied include the start of the symbol variation.

Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the right-handed instruction display control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 (variation 1) in FIG. 72 in the modification 1 from the present embodiment. First, in step 3502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game is being executed. If Yes in step 3502, the process proceeds to step 3508. On the other hand, if No in step 3502, in step 3504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 3504, in step 3505, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the non-game period measurement timer value is a predetermined value (5 seconds in this example) or more. In the case of Yes in step 3505, in step 3506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle D44 is detected. If Yes in step 3506, the process proceeds to step 3510. In addition, even if No in step 3505, the process proceeds to step 3510. On the other hand, if No in step 3506, in step 3508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display, and the next process (process in step 2999). ). Further, in step 3510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the first right-handed instruction display, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). Here, the upper right corner of the figure is a display image diagram of a right-handed instruction display. As shown in the figure, in the first modification from the present embodiment, the player is hit right-handed (a game method in which a game ball is launched toward the right side of the game board surface, and the firing intensity of the firing handle D44 is relative to each other. There are two right-handed instruction displays, a first right-handed instruction display and a second right-handed instruction display, as displays on the effect display device SG that encourages right-handedness when the size is increased. Further, the second right-handed instruction display has a larger display area than the first right-handed instruction display, and is configured to be easily visible (conspicuous) to the player. By configuring in this way, the first right-handed instruction display is displayed when it is desired to emphasize the effect accompanying the symbol change, and when the player is disadvantaged if the right-handed player is not executed. It can be configured to display the second right-handed instruction display (or both the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display may be displayed).

If No in step 3504, in step 3512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display (for the right-handed instruction display that is not displayed). (Do not execute processing) Set the command. Next, in step 3513, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the non-game period measurement timer value is a predetermined value (5 seconds in this example) or more. In the case of Yes in step 3513, in step 3514, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle D44 is detected. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3516, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces a predetermined effect (an effect executed only when the firing handle D44 is operated, for example, "Fight!" Is displayed). The command to be displayed on the display device SG is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2999). If No in step 3513 or step 3514, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2999) without executing the predetermined effect. As described above, in the change example 1 from the present embodiment, a predetermined time (5 seconds) has passed since the non-gaming state, the non-time shortening gaming state is reached, and the special game is being executed. If the firing handle D44 is operated in the case where the firing handle D44 is not operated, a predetermined effect that can be executed only when the firing handle D44 is operated can be executed. The predetermined time may be longer than 5 seconds (for example, 30 seconds), or the time when the standby demo screen is started to be displayed (for example, 240 seconds), and the firing handle D44 is operated during the execution of the standby demo. The predetermined effect can be executed by doing so), or the time for the standby demo screen to end the display (for example, 900 seconds), and the predetermined effect can be achieved by operating the firing handle D44 after the display of the standby demo is completed. Can be executed). In addition, when the firing handle D44 is operated when a predetermined time (5 seconds) has passed since the non-gaming state, the time is shortened, and the special game is not being executed, the first It is configured to display both the 1 right-handed instruction display and the 2nd right-handed instruction display. In addition, there are a plurality of types of the predetermined effects, and it may be configured to determine which effect is to be executed by lottery.

Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the continuous hitting effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2750 in FIG. 59 in the first modification from the present embodiment. First, in step 2788-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is currently in the button continuous striking valid period (the period during which the continuous striking effect is displayed by pressing the sub-input button SB). If Yes in step 2788-1, the repeated hit button image is displayed in step 2788-2. Next, in step 2788-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB is newly pressed and held (the sub-input button SB is turned on and then turned on. If it continues for 0.5 seconds, it is judged that it has been pressed and held). In the case of Yes in step 2788-3, in step 2788-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to the auto continuous hitting valid flag (when the flag is turned on and the button repeated hitting valid period is in effect, auto is used. The continuous hitting effect will be executed) is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2788-5. Even if No in step 22788-3, the process proceeds to step 2788-5.

Next, in step 2788-5, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the auto-continuous hitting enable flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2788-5, in step 2788-6, the automatic continuous striking effect is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2788-9. It should be noted that the auto-continuous hitting effect is an effect like an effect that occurs when the player presses and holds the sub-input button SB, which overlaps with the continuous-hit button image, and the player presses and holds the sub-input button SB. If it is continued, one continuous striking effect is continuously executed (effect is generated) every 0.2 seconds. It should be noted that the production mode of the automatic continuous striking effect and the production mode of the single-shot continuous striking effect described later are the same production mode, and may be collectively referred to as a continuous striking effect. On the other hand, if No in step 2788-5, in step 2788-7, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a single press operation on the sub-input button SB (the sub-input button SB is turned off → on). If the on state does not continue for 0.5 seconds and then turns off again, it is determined that there was a single push operation). In the case of Yes in step 2788-7, in step 2788-8, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the single-shot continuous striking effect, and proceeds to step 2788-9. Even if No in step 2788-7, the process proceeds to step 2788-9. It should be noted that the single-shot continuous hitting effect is an effect like an effect that occurs when the player presses the sub-input button SB in a single shot, and the player presses the sub-input button SB in a single shot. Each time the push is executed, the continuous striking effect is executed (effect is generated). Next, in step 2788-9, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined number of repeated hitting effects have been executed in one button repeated hitting valid period. It should be noted that the predetermined number of repeated hits means that the total number of the number of repeated hits performed by the automatic continuous hit effect and the number of repeated hits executed by the single-shot continuous hit effect may be a predetermined number. Then it is 10 times. If Yes in step 2788-9, the process proceeds to step 2790-2. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2788-9, in step 2790-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to the end timing of the button continuous striking valid period (in this example, 4 seconds after the start timing of the button continuous striking valid period). Determine if it has been reached. If Yes in step 2790-1, the process proceeds to step 2790-2, and if No, the process proceeds to step 2790-7. Next, in step 2790-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the cut-in effect, and the process proceeds to step 2790-7.

Further, in the case of No in step 2788-1, in step 2790-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is currently in the auto continuous hit acceptance period (by pressing and holding the sub input button SB, the continuous hit effect is continuously displayed. It is determined whether or not it is a different period). In this example, the auto-repeated hit acceptance period is set to be provided even during the period other than the button continuous striking valid period in the symbol fluctuation period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the auto-repeated hit acceptance period is not limited to the button continuous striking valid period. It may be configured not to provide, or it may be configured so that the button continuous hitting valid period and the automatic continuous hitting acceptance period are always set in some symbol fluctuations. For example, a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state. In the fluctuation time such as the symbol fluctuation at the time, the symbol fluctuation of the predetermined time or more, the symbol fluctuation of the predetermined time or less, etc., the button continuous striking valid period and the auto continuous striking acceptance period may always be set. In addition, except for some situations, the button repeated hit valid period and the automatic continuous hit acceptance period may be used. For example, the button repeated hit valid period is always during the jackpot start demo time, the jackpot end demo time, and the variable fixed time. Moreover, the automatic continuous hitting valid period may be set. In addition, the period during which the sub-input button SB is held down may be the automatic continuous hit acceptance period (the button repeated hit valid period is a part of the symbol variation in which the continuous hit effect is executed). In the case of Yes in step 2790-3, in step 2790-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the continuous hit button image. Next, in step 2790-5, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB is newly pressed and held. In the case of Yes in step 2790-5, in step 2790-6, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the auto-continuous hitting enable flag, and proceeds to step 2790-7. In addition, even if No in step 2790-3 or step 2790-5, the process proceeds to step 2790-7.

Next, in step 2790-7, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the auto-continuous hitting enable flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2790-7, in step 2790-8, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB is off (may be not long-pressed). .. In the case of Yes in step 2790-8, in step 2790-9, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the auto-continuous hitting enable flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028). Even if No in step 2790-7 or step 2790-8, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028).

Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the button effect execution period. In the figure, a symbol variation in which a button repeated striking effect is executed, which is a variation time of 60 seconds, is illustrated. First, the sub-input button SB is disabled for 3 seconds after the symbol change is started, and the decorative symbol is changed. After that, the auto-continuous hit acceptance period starts from the timing 3 seconds after the start of the symbol change. At that timing, the effective period of repeated button presses has not yet started. After that, two seconds later, the first button repeated effective period is started (the button repeated effective period is provided three times for one symbol variation). As described above, in the change example 1 from the present embodiment, the automatic continuous hitting acceptance period is provided before the start timing of the first button repeated hitting valid period, for example, the start of the first button repeated hitting valid period. Even if the long press of the sub-input button SB is started 1 second before the timing, the automatic continuous hitting effect is started from the start timing of the first button repeated hitting valid period. After that, the first button repeated hit valid period ends 4 seconds after the start timing of the first button repeated hit valid period, but the automatic continuous hit acceptance period continues. After that, from the end timing of the first button repeated hit effective period, the button repeated hit valid period is no longer for 2 seconds, then the second button repeated hit valid period for 4 seconds, and then the button repeated hit for 2 seconds from the end timing of the second button repeated hit valid period It is configured so that it is no longer valid, and then the third button stroke is valid for 4 seconds. In addition, the automatic continuous hit acceptance period will continue until the end timing of the third button repeated hit valid period. As described above, in the change example 1 from the present embodiment, three button continuous hit effective periods are provided for one symbol change, and the automatic continuous hit acceptance period starts from the start timing of the first button continuous hit valid period. Is continuously provided from the timing 2 seconds before to the end timing of the third button repeated hit valid period, that is, a certain button repeated hit valid period and the next button continuous hit valid period (for example, the first button repeated hit valid period). The period between the period and the valid period of the second button repeated hits), which is not the valid period of the repeated button hits, is also the auto repeated hit acceptance period. It should be noted that the automatic repeated hitting effect is not executed even if the sub input button is pressed and held while the symbol is changing to execute the hidden button effect. In this example, the auto-continuous hitting effect is executed when the long press of the sub-input button SB is started in the auto-continuous hitting acceptance period provided before the button continuous hitting valid period. The present invention is not limited, and if the long press of the sub-input button SB is started before the button continuous striking valid period, the automatic continuous striking effect may not be executed.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the change example 1 from the present embodiment, the player repeatedly hits the sub-input button by pressing and holding the sub-input button when the button effect is executed (when the button continuous press effect is executed). The auto-repeated hit function is turned on by configuring the auto-repeated hit function that will execute the same effect as when operating, and by setting the auto-repeated hit acceptance period before the button repeated hit valid period. In this situation, even if the long press of the sub-input button is started at a timing before the button repeated hit valid period, the auto continuous hit effect is executed, so that the sub input is performed before the button repeated hit valid period. If you press and hold the button for a long time, all the repeated hitting effects will be executed, and you can make it a user-friendly game machine in that you do not have to bother to execute the repeated hitting operation, and the button repeated hitting effect is highly interesting. It is possible to draw more attention to the player with respect to the effect on the effect display device at the time of execution.

In the first modification from the present embodiment, the automatic continuous hitting effect is always executed every 0.2 seconds when the automatic continuous hitting effect is executed, but the execution mode of the automatic continuous hitting effect is not limited to this. , In a gaming machine configured so that the automatic continuous hitting effect can be executed even when the execution variation of the hidden button effect is different, the execution interval of the automatic continuous hitting effect may be different when the executed effect is different. Specifically, when the hidden button effect is executed, the auto-repeated effect is executed every 0.5 seconds, whereas when the button-repeated effect is executed, the auto-repeated effect is executed every 0.2 seconds. May be good. In addition, in such a configuration, the start timing of the button repeated hitting effective period in the hidden button effect may be set after the execution start timing of the reach effect, and the button repeated hitting effective period in the hidden button effect may be set after the button repeated hitting effect. It may be configured to be longer than the effective period of repeated button presses in. Further, as the button continuous striking effect, the button continuous striking effect A and the button continuous striking effect B are provided. When the button continuous striking effect A is executed, the automatic continuous striking effect is executed every 0.5 seconds, whereas the button continuous striking effect B is executed. Occasionally, the automatic continuous striking effect may be executed every 0.2 seconds (the execution interval of the automatic continuous striking effect differs depending on the type of the button continuous striking effect). In addition, in such a configuration, the length of the valid period may be different between the button valid period of the button continuous striking effect A and the button valid period of the button continuous striking effect B. Further, the button continuous striking effect A and the button continuous striking effect B may be configured so that the predetermined number of times (the number of continuous striking operations for which the cut-in effect is executed) in step 2788-9 is different. When configured, the execution interval of the automatic continuous striking effect may be different between the button continuous striking effect A and the button continuous striking effect B.

Next, FIG. 76 is an example of the display priority applicable to the gaming machine of this example. In the figure, the display contents that can be displayed on the effect display device SG are listed. Those with high display priority are shown in the upper row, and those with low display priority are shown in the lower row. When the display content having a high display priority and the display content having a low display priority are displayed in an overlapping manner, specifically, for example, when a right-handed instruction display and a decorative design are displayed in an overlapping manner, the display content is displayed in an overlapping manner. Regarding the display of the overlapping part, the right-handed instruction display with high display priority is displayed on the front side (displayed so that it can be seen), and the decorative design with low display priority is displayed on the back side (displayed so that it can be visually recognized). It becomes invisible because it is hidden behind the right-handed instruction display). In addition, from the one with the highest display priority in this example, "Error display-> Right-handed instruction display-> Power saving display-> Standby demo screen-> Music selection screen display-> Customization execution screen display-> Customization guidance screen display (automatic button operation setting) Screen) → Volume / light amount adjustment screen display → Customization guidance screen display (volume / light amount) → Spec band display → Traffic light → 2nd decorative design → Decorative design → Hold display ”. The second decorative symbol is a normal decorative symbol (referred to as the first decorative symbol) that may be hidden in order to show the moving image to the player when the super reach or the like is executed. Even in this case, from the viewpoint of user friendliness, it is a display of the decorative symbol to be displayed in the corner of the display area SG10 so that the player can recognize which decorative symbol the reach is related to, and the display of the second decorative symbol. The display area of the first decorative pattern is configured to be larger than the area. The display priority may be changed, for example, "Error display-> Right-handed instruction display-> Power saving display-> Music selection screen display-> Customization execution screen display-> Spec band display-> Standby demo screen-> Customization guidance screen display (Automatic button operation setting screen) → Volume / light amount adjustment screen display → Customization guidance screen display (volume / light amount) → Traffic light → Second decorative symbol → Hold display → Decorative symbol ”. However, it is not desirable to change the display priority of "error display", "right-handed instruction display", and "power saving display" because it has a large effect on the profit of the player. Further, regarding the "decorative symbol" and the "hold display", the display priority is configured to be different between the non-game period (non-game period measurement timer HY10t> 0) and the game (non-game period measurement timer HY10t = 0). For example, in the non-game period, the display priority is changed from the one with the highest display priority to "decorative symbol → hold display", whereas during the game, the display priority is changed to ". It may be configured to be "hold display-> decorative pattern". With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming invisible when the hold display is changed as the hold look-ahead effect while the decorative symbol is changing.

Next, FIG. 77 is an image diagram of a hidden button effect applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. In the figure, the super reach first half effect and the super reach second half effect are executed in a certain symbol variation. As a specific example in which the super reach first half effect and the super reach second half effect are executed, the super reach first half effect is executed in the symbol fluctuation related to a certain loss, and the loss symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the super reach first half effect. To do. In such a case, the lost symbol is stopped as a fixed stop symbol at the end of the first half of the super reach effect, and the lost symbol that was temporarily stopped at the end of the first half of the super reach effect is re-variated to execute the second half of the super reach effect. It has a case (it may be configured so that the super reach second half production is executed without temporarily stopping the lost symbol at the end of the super reach first half production). It should be noted that the jackpot expectation is higher when the symbol variation ends at the end of the super reach second half effect than when the symbol variation ends at the end of the super reach first half effect. Returning to the explanation of the drawing, first, in a certain symbol variation, the effect display device SG starts the effect of the first half of the super reach, and the button image is not displayed. After that, when the sub-input button SB is pressed in a situation where the button image is not displayed, as a hidden button effect, a display prompting the player to perform a continuous hit operation together with a button repeated hit effect (meter) (in this example, "continuous hit !!" Is displayed) is displayed. Here, the game machine in the figure has an automatic continuous hitting function (the same configuration as in the first modification from the present embodiment), but when the hidden button effect shown in the figure is executed, the game is played. Even if a person presses and holds the sub input button SB for a long time, the automatic continuous hitting effect is not executed (the player needs to perform the continuous hitting operation by himself / herself). After that, when the player repeatedly hits the sub-input button SB and the number of times the sub-input button SB is pressed reaches a predetermined number of times, the meter becomes full. After that, when the number of times the sub-input button SB is pressed reaches a predetermined number, the meter display is erased, a lever image is displayed, and a display prompting the player to operate the lever SB-3 (in this example, "lever". !! ”is displayed. After that, by operating the lever SB-3, the cut-in image is displayed on the effect display device SG, and a display indicating that the super reach continues (the second half effect of the super reach is executed) is displayed. After that, the second half of Super Reach production will start. In the second half of the super reach effect, the hidden button effect that executes the repeated hit operation is not executed. In addition, as the configuration applicable to the hidden button effect in the figure, (1) the jackpot expectation of the symbol fluctuation during execution differs depending on the effect result of the hidden button effect, and (2) the effect result of the hidden button effect. The composition is such that the degree of expectation that the second half of Super Reach production will be executed differs depending on the situation.

Next, FIG. 78 is an image diagram of a hidden button effect applicable to the game machine according to this example. First, the super reach effect is started due to a certain symbol change, and the button image is not displayed. Next, when the sub-input button SB is pressed, a continuous hit button image (meter effect) is displayed as a hidden button effect, and a display prompting the player to perform a continuous hit operation (in this example, "continuous hit !!" is displayed) is displayed. Is displayed. Similar to the configuration of FIG. 77, the gaming machine in the figure has an auto continuous striking function, but in the execution variation of the hidden button effect, even if the player presses and holds the sub input button SB, the auto continuous striking effect is produced. Is not executed (the player needs to repeatedly hit the ball by himself / herself). Next, the player repeatedly presses the sub input button SB, but the meter is not full and the meter display is erased, and the effect display device SG fails the effect (meaning that the meter is not full). The effect suggesting) is displayed. In this example, when the button repeated hitting effect (meter effect) of the hidden button effect fails (when the failure effect is executed), when the button repeated hitting effect (meter effect) of the hidden button effect succeeds (cut-in effect). Is configured to have a lower jackpot expectation than (when is executed). In addition, even if the continuous hitting effect in the hidden button production fails, the latter half of the super reach can be executed, but it is configured so that the successful continuous hitting production in the hidden button production makes it easier to execute the latter half of the super reach than the failure. There is. In addition, in FIGS. 77 and 78, a button repeated hitting effect (meter display) is generated as a hidden button effect, and the jackpot expectation of the symbol fluctuation during execution is suggested only by whether or not the meter is full. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter display is gradually increased by the player repeatedly hitting the sub-input button SB, and at the end of the predetermined number of repeated hits or the button validity period. It may be configured to suggest the jackpot expectation of the symbol fluctuation during execution (or the expectation that the latter half of the super reach will be executed) depending on how much the meter display in the above is increased (the more meter displays, the jackpot expectation). Degree, or the degree of expectation for execution in the latter half of Super Reach will increase). In addition, the effect is not limited to the effect mode in which the meter display increases. For example, the effect is displayed as a continuous hit effect, and the color of the effect changes stepwise each time the continuous hit operation is performed (“blue → yellow”). → Green → Red ”may be configured to change to a color with a higher expectation of big hits).

Next, FIG. 79 is an image diagram of a hidden button effect applicable to the game machine according to this example. First, the super reach effect is started in a certain symbol change, and the button image is not displayed. Next, when the sub-input button SB is pressed, a continuous hit button image (meter effect) is displayed as a hidden button effect, and a display prompting the player to perform a continuous hit operation (in this example, "continuous hit !!" is displayed). Is displayed. Here, the game machine in the figure has an automatic continuous hitting function (the same configuration as in the first modification from the present embodiment), and even when the hidden button effect shown in the figure is executed, the player Is configured so that the automatic continuous striking effect can be executed by pressing and holding the sub input button SB (the player may perform the continuous striking operation by himself / herself). In the figure, the case where the player repeatedly presses the sub-input button SB is described without parentheses, and the case where the player presses and holds the sub-input button SB is described in parentheses. After that, when the continuous pressing operation (or long pressing) of the sub input button SB is started, the button image related to the single button pressing effect is displayed as the button effect while the meter is being displayed, that is, during the button continuous pressing valid period ( The repeated button press effect and the single button press effect are executed in duplicate). After that, in the situation where the meter and the button image are displayed, the first cut-in effect is executed as the single button press effect by continuing the continuous striking operation (or continuing the long press) ( The valid period of repeated button presses related to the continuous stroke effect continues). After that, by continuing the continuous pressing operation of the sub input button SB (or by continuing to press and hold it), the meter display becomes full, and then the meter display is erased and the lever image is displayed. At the same time, a display prompting the player to operate the lever SB-3 (in this example, "pull the lever !!" is displayed) is displayed. Next, by operating the lever SB-3, the second cut-in effect is displayed, and then the jackpot symbol is stopped as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. In this way, in the figure, when the hidden button effect is executed, the button image is displayed while the meter is being displayed (during the effective period of repeated button presses), and one symbol change is performed three times. The effect of operating the operation member (sub input button SB or lever SB-3) is executed (the first button repeated hitting effect and the second button single pressing effect are executed, and the third lever effect is executed. It may be configured not to be executed). Further, in the figure, since the automatic continuous striking function can be executed even in the execution fluctuation of the hidden button effect, the player presses and holds the sub input button SB in the symbol variation in which the hidden button effect is executed. If it continues, the button continuous press effect and the button single press effect are executed (as the meter increases, the cut-in effect related to the button single press is executed), and the player is configured to execute. You will be able to concentrate on the production.

Next, FIG. 80 is an image diagram of a hidden button effect applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. The upper part of the figure is a meter image displayed after the operation of the sub-input button SB is executed a predetermined number of times or more during the button validity period when the hidden button effect is executed. The left side is the case where the meter display is lit up to 1 level, the center display is the case where the meter display is lit up to 4 levels, and the right side display is lit up to 7 levels (full tank). If you are. After that, when the sub input button SB is operated more than a predetermined number of times, or the effective period of repeated button presses has elapsed), the meter display is erased, the lever image is displayed, and the player operates the lever SB-3. (In this example, "Pull the lever !!" is displayed) is displayed, and then the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed when the symbol change ends, but the sub-input button more than the specified number of times Expectation of big hit of symbol fluctuation during execution by meter display (display of the maximum meter in the fluctuation that does not increase even if the button is repeatedly hit) when the SB operation is executed or the button repeated hit valid period has elapsed The meter ends in 1 stage (big hit expectation = large)> the meter ends in 7 stages (full tank) (big hit expectation = medium)> the meter ends in 4 stages (big hit expectation = small) It is configured. As described above, in the figure, when the hidden button effect is executed and the sub-input button SB is operated more than a predetermined number of times when the symbol change is executed, or when the button repeated press valid period has elapsed, the meter The jackpot expectation of the symbol fluctuation during execution by the display (display of the maximum meter in the fluctuation that does not increase even if the meter is repeatedly hit) tends to be higher as the meter is increasing in many stages. (7 stages have higher expectation of big hits than 4 stages), but the highest expectation of big hits is 1 stage when the meter is increasing. In this way, when the stage of the meter is increased by the continuous striking operation, the stage of the meter is not increased at all even if the continuous striking operation is executed (a surprising development for the player). In this case, if the player feels uncomfortable), the expectation of a big hit related to the symbol change becomes high, or it is definite that the symbol change becomes a big hit (so-called premier production). May be good.

Next, FIG. 81 is an image diagram of a customized guide screen applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. First, to explain from the upper left of the figure, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-gaming state (non-gaming period), by operating the sub input button SB, the player as shown in the upper right. The selection screen (second customization guidance screen) is displayed (setting items that can be set by the player are displayed. In this example, "automatic button operation setting", "light intensity adjustment function", "volume adjustment function" Can be displayed). While the player selection screen is displayed, the player can select the item to be set by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB-2, and by operating the sub input button SB, "automatic button operation setting". , "Light intensity adjustment function", or "volume adjustment function" can be adjusted.

Further, when the sub input button SB is operated to set the "automatic button operation setting", the automatic button operation setting screen is displayed as the above-mentioned customization execution screen as shown in the lower right row, and the cross key SB- The left and right buttons of 2 can be used to select "ON" or "OFF" for the automatic button operation setting, and the sub-input button SB can be used to determine "ON" or "OFF" for the automatic button operation setting. Has been done. Similarly, the light amount adjustment function, the volume adjustment function setting, etc. are also displayed as the light amount adjustment screen and the volume adjustment screen, and the game machine can be customized. In the figure, when the sub input button SB is operated while the standby demo screen is displayed, or when the automatic button operation setting is selected on the player selection screen, the automatic button operation setting screen is displayed. Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display a menu screen in which the item to be changed from a plurality of items can be selected. The item whose setting can be changed on the menu screen is the effect mode (background). Selection of production, production tendency), selection of occurrence frequency of hold look-ahead effect, advance notice production suggesting jackpot expectation of the fluctuation with relatively high jackpot expectation other than hold change production, movable The frequency of occurrence of high-impact effects using physical objects) may be changed. Further, when the execution frequency of a certain effect is increased, the expectation of a big hit when the certain effect is generated decreases, and when the execution frequency of a certain effect is decreased, the big hit when the certain effect occurs Expectations are configured to increase. It should be noted that the effect frequency may be adjusted so that a specific effect occurs only when the big hit is confirmed.

Next, to explain the lower left, when the standby demo screen is displayed and the sub-input button SB is operated, the automatic button operation setting screen is displayed as the customization execution screen, which is related to the automatic button operation setting. It is possible to customize the game machine. In this way, if the sub-input button SB is operated while the standby demo screen is displayed, the player selection screen is not displayed and the customization execution screen is displayed (without going through the player selection screen). It is configured to. In addition, when the standby demo screen is displayed, the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, and the volume adjustment screen is displayed by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2. (The screen may not be displayed and only volume control and light intensity control may be enabled). As described above, in the figure, the screen display control when the sub input button SB is operated differs depending on whether the decorative symbol during non-game is stopped or displayed and the standby demo screen is displayed. It is configured as. Note that the configuration in which the screen display control differs when the sub input button SB is operated is not limited to the configuration shown in the figure, and the player can operate the sub input button SB when the standby demo screen is displayed. By configuring the selection screen (second customization guidance screen) to be displayed and the customization execution screen to be displayed by operating the sub-input button SB when the non-gaming decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The screen display control when the sub-input button SB is operated may be different depending on whether the decorative symbol during non-game is stopped or displayed and the standby demo screen is displayed.

Next, FIG. 82 shows the number of types of effects to which the auto-continuous hitting effect can be applied, which is applicable to this example (particularly, when the auto-continuous hitting effect is configured to be executable as in the first modification from the present embodiment). This is an example. As shown in the figure, in this example, the game states in which the automatic continuous striking effect can be executed include a non-time reduction game state, a time reduction game state, and a special game execution. We are comparing the three states with the case. In each state, the number of types of effects to which the automatic continuous hitting effect can be applied (the number of types of automatic continuous hitting effects that can be executed) is 4 types in the non-time reduction game state and 3 types in the time reduction game state. , There are two types of cases where the special game is being executed, and there are more types in the non-time reduction game state than in the time reduction game state. Further, in each state, the number of types of effects to which the automatic continuous hitting effect for which the button repeated hitting effective period of the automatic continuous hitting effect is a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) or more can be applied may be in the non-time reduction game state. There is one type, one type in the time-reduced game state, and two types in the case where the special game is being executed, and the number of types is the largest when the special game is in progress. In addition, the auto-continuous striking effect is successful (when the result or display mode that satisfies a specific condition is achieved by the auto-continuous striking effect executed by pressing and holding the sub-input button SB, it is considered successful, and the sub-input button SB is pressed and held. The number of types of auto-repeated effects that make it certain that the symbol variation will be a big hit when the result or display mode that does not satisfy the specific conditions is obtained by the executed auto-repeated effects is non-existent. There is one type in the time-saving game state and two types in the time-saving game state, and there are more types in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state. .. In addition, when the automatic continuous hitting effect during the special game is successful (it is considered successful when the result or display mode that satisfies the specific condition is obtained by the automatic continuous hitting effect executed by pressing and holding the sub input button SB). , It becomes definite that the game state after the end of the special game becomes the probability-variable game state {the time shortening game state (when the open extension function is activated) may be used}. In the above example, there are a plurality of cut-in effects that can be executed after the valid period of the automatic continuous striking effect ends, and the plurality of cut-in effects are classified into a success effect and a failure effect. An example is illustrated in a case where the jackpot expectation of the symbol variation when the success effect is executed is configured to be higher than the jackpot expectation of the symbol variation when the failure effect is executed. It should be noted that the final result of the automatic continuous striking effect is a certain result (for example, it changes stepwise according to the continuous striking operation, and the final display is changed according to the continuous striking result). The rate at which the display notifying that the final result is definite to be a big hit appears is higher in the time-reduced gaming state than in the non-time-shortening gaming state.

The gaming machine according to this example is configured not to prohibit the light intensity adjustment from the viewpoint of epilepsy prevention (user-friendly perspective), but as a process when a power failure occurs in such a configuration, the light intensity While the setting (light level before power off) is temporarily stored, the volume setting (volume level before power off) may be configured not to be temporarily stored (both may be configured to be temporarily stored). ).

Further, in the game machine according to this example, a plurality of effect display devices may be provided, such as a first effect display device SG and a second effect display device SG-2. , The first effect display device SG plays the same role as in the present embodiment, and the second effect display device SG-2 is configured so that the display area is smaller than that of the first effect display device SG, and the first effect display device SG When the standby demo screen is displayed at, the volume level and the light amount level are always displayed on the second effect display device SG (not displayed because there is no hold), and the second effect is displayed while the symbol is changing. The display device SG-2 may be configured to execute the hold display. The second effect display device SG-2 may be configured to be movable like the movable body accessory YK. The display on the second effect display device SG-2 during the symbol change is not limited to the hold display, and may be displayed as a notice effect. Further, the decorative symbol is always displayed on the first effect display device SG (except during the display of the standby demo screen) even in the non-gaming state, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the second effect display device SG-2. The stop symbol (or hold display) of the decorative symbol is not displayed even while the display is stopped, and the volume level and the light intensity level are displayed. That is, the display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the first effect display device SG so that the player can clearly see it in the non-gaming state, and the volume level is displayed on the second effect display device that does not display the decorative symbol. By displaying the light amount level, it is possible to configure the display that is important for the progress of the game to be easier to see, and it is possible to make the game machine user-friendly.

Further, in the game machine according to this example, as an element that can be changed by the player, the number of game balls displayed on the effect display device SG during the special game is paid out by winning a prize in the large winning opening. Change the number or the number of game balls increased during the special game by subtracting the number of game balls fired by the player during the special game from the number of game balls paid out by winning the big prize opening. It may be configured as possible. Specifically, change on the customize screen, or press the sub-input button SB or cross key SB-2 at the start of the big hit, during the big hit, or during a specific symbol change (for example, during the symbol change in the time reduction game state). It may be configured to be changeable by operation. In addition, the number of game balls displayed on the effect display device SG during the special game is the number of game balls paid out by winning a prize in the large winning opening, or the number of game balls paid out by winning a prize in the large winning opening. The administrator may be able to change whether the number of game balls increased during the special game is obtained by subtracting the number of game balls fired by the player during the special game from the number (may be changed only by the administrator). , Both the player and the administrator may be changeable). Specifically, it may be configured to change by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB-2 on the management menu screen.

Next, FIG. 83 is a game flow in the present embodiment. Here, the flow of the main game will be described. First, in a low probability and non-time saving (normal mode), a game machine ball is launched aiming at entering the first main game start port A10 (left-handed), and the game ball is placed at the first main game start port A10. By entering the ball, a game is performed according to the first main game symbol. When the first main game symbol becomes a big hit (first hit), a big hit with a low probability and a short time (a big hit that shifts to a non-probability variable game state and a time-shortened game state after the big hit ends) or a high probability and a short time It can be either a jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state and a time-shortening gaming state after the jackpot ends). During the big hit, the game ball is fired on the right side of the board (right-handed), and the game ball is put into the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20. When the big hit is over, the mission is started after the big hit is over. The gaming state at this time is either low probability and time reduction or high probability and time reduction, and when the mission is successful, the game state shifts to the probability variation mode indicating that the mission is high probability and time reduction. On the other hand, if the mission fails, the time reduction ends and the mode shifts to a low probability and non-time reduction or a high probability and non-time reduction latent mode. If the big hit is made again from the latent mode, it becomes the same as the first hit, and when the latent mode ends, it becomes the normal mode with low probability and non-time saving. In the probabilistic mode, the game ball is hit right to enter the second main game start port B10, and the game is played with the second main game symbol. In the second main game symbol, it becomes a probabilistic big hit (a big hit with a high probability), and when the big hit ends, it becomes a probable change mode again. On the other hand, when the second main game symbol becomes a non-probability variable big hit (a big hit with a low probability), after the big hit ends, the mode shifts to a low-probability and short-time mode. Here, when the time reduction is completed (100 times in this example), the mode shifts to the normal mode, which has a low probability and the time reduction, and again aims at entering the first main game start port A10 (left-handed), the first main game. The game will be played with a symbol.

(Summary)
As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can select the music during the big hit and during the time reduction, and the music determination method at the time of selecting the music during the big hit and during the time reduction is different. Further, the playback start point of the music at the time of selecting the music is also different, and it is possible to provide a variety of operation modes even though the operation is the same music selection. In addition, even a player who does not select a song can easily enjoy various songs by selecting "Random".

(Modification example)
Here, a configuration that can be changed from the present embodiment will be described as a modified example.
(1) The predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) of the probability variation mode may be a stage in which the average fluctuation time is set short, and in this case, a dedicated BGM may be used to make music selection impossible. In this case, it is also possible to configure the music so that the music can be selected after a predetermined number of times (here, after 21 times).
(2) In a gaming machine (so-called ST machine) in which the probability change is completed within a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), in order to perform a special effect in the period of the remaining 5 times of the probability change, a variation mode table dedicated to the remaining 5 times is provided. It may be configured to be referred to, and music selection may be impossible at this time as well. In this case, when combined with (1), the probability variation 1 to 20 times: music cannot be selected, 21 to 95 times: music can be selected, and 96 to 100 times: music cannot be selected.
(3) As multiple jackpots, jackpot A: 10 round jackpot that allows music to be selected, jackpot B: music cannot be selected before promotion, and music can be selected after promotion. Jackpot C: music cannot be selected. It may be configured to include a 10-round jackpot.

(Second Embodiment)
In this embodiment, the small hit is not provided and may be provided temporarily, but with that alone, the prize ball can be obtained by entering the large winning opening C10 during the special game related to the big hit. Since it is the main game, winning a prize ball by a small hit is just a bonus element. Therefore, a configuration in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained by a small hit is defined as the second embodiment, and the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

FIG. 84 is a table configuration diagram of the main game symbol lottery according to the second embodiment. The differences from the present embodiment are the small hit probability, the big hit symbol, and the variation mode (variation time) at the time of the small hit in the second main game. First, the small hit probability in the second main game is 1004/1024, and the symbol variation on the second main game side is configured to be a small hit with a high probability.

Next, the jackpot symbol is to be selected from 5A and 7A on the first main game side and 5B on the second main game side, and regardless of which jackpot symbol is the jackpot, after the special game is completed. Is configured to transition to a probability-variable gaming state (so-called ST) with a limited number of times. In the special game related to 5A and 5B, 2 rounds of big hits (not shown, but it is difficult to enter the game ball because the big winning opening C10 is opened shortly), and in the special game related to 7A, 4 rounds A big hit (although not shown in particular, it is easy to enter a game ball because the big winning opening C10 is opened for a long time) will be executed. It should be noted that the jackpot by any of the jackpot symbols does not have to be configured to shift to the probability-variable gaming state with a limited number of times after the end of the special game, and the probability-variable gaming state by the jackpot symbol as in the present embodiment. The configuration may be different depending on whether or not to shift to.

Further, in this example, after the end of the special game related to 7A or 5B, it is configured to be able to shift to the time shortening game state (in this example, in particular, it refers to the state in which the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on). This example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to have a jackpot that does not shift to.

Further, the fluctuation time on the second main game side is configured so that a relatively short time is determined only during the probability fluctuation game and the time reduction game (high probability and time reduction). For example, during non-probability variable game and non-time reduction game (low probability and non-time reduction), or during probability variation game and non-time reduction game (high probability and non-time reduction), the second main game side In the case of a small hit, the variation mode is determined from Bkx (75 seconds), Bky (85 seconds), and Bkz (95 seconds). In this case, since the fluctuation time is relatively long and the fluctuation time is randomly determined from the three patterns, the game is not during the probability fluctuation game and the time reduction game (high probability and time reduction). In the state, the player is inefficient even if he / she tries to obtain a prize ball by a small hit, and the game is executed on the first main game side. On the other hand, during the probability fluctuation game and the time reduction game (high probability and time reduction), when a small hit is made on the second main game side, the variation mode of Bk2 (1 second) is uniformly selected (and the variation mode of Bk2 (1 second) is uniformly selected. On the second main game side, there is a high probability of winning a small hit). With such a table configuration, the player executes the game on the second main game side during the probability fluctuation game and the time reduction game (high probability and time reduction), and efficiently obtains the prize ball by the small hit game. It becomes possible to do. Even in the case of loss fluctuation, the probability is high during non-probability fluctuation games and non-time reduction games (low probability and non-time reduction), or during probability fluctuation games and non-time reduction games (high probability and non-time reduction). It is configured so that a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively longer than that during the variation game and the time reduction game (high probability and time reduction) is selected.

Next, FIG. 85 is an image diagram of a music selection screen when a small hit occurs during a short time. First, in the upper left figure, the music selection screen during the time saving is displayed. Next, moving to the upper right figure, the decorative symbol stops at "AAA", indicating the occurrence of a small hit. At this time as well, music selection is possible. Next, when moving to the lower figure, one ball is inserted into the large winning opening (1st large winning opening C10 or 2nd large winning opening C20) opened by a small hit. “+15”, which indicates the number of prize balls when the ball is entered, is displayed in the substantially center of the liquid crystal screen. The total number of acquisitions has also been updated. At this time as well, music selection is possible, and when the small hit ends, the next fluctuation starts, and the figure returns to the upper left figure. That is, in the case of a small hit, the music can be continuously selected, and the selected music is also continuously output. However, if you want to output an SE that indicates that you have entered the ball with the display of "+15" when you enter the big winning opening, lower the volume of the song and emphasize the volume of the SE (that is, the volume is , SE> Music) is preferable.

(Third Embodiment)
First, the game machine according to the third embodiment has a specific area C22 in which a game ball can enter inside the second large winning opening C20. Further, the gaming machine according to the third embodiment has a configuration (so-called VST machine, so-called VST machine) in which a game ball enters a specific area C22 during execution of a special game and the game shifts to a probability-variable gaming state after the completion of the special game. It is a ball confirmation machine).

FIG. 86 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that the combination of the main game symbols that are the big hits is different, and the configuration of each variation mode determination table is changed. Among the main game symbols that are big hits, the main game symbols that facilitate the entry of the game ball into the specific area C22 are "5A, 7A, 3B, 5B, 7B". The main game symbol in which a special game that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area C22 is executed is "2A".

Next, FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 28 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1611 (third) and step 1850 (third), the purpose of which is a distribution game (a unit for opening the second large winning opening C20 having a specific area C22). It is configured so that the game) can be executed. That is, after setting the special game start display instruction command to the sub side in step 1608, or when the special game execution flag is turned on in step 1610, in step 1611 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M Determines whether or not the currently executed round is a distribution game execution round (second round and four rounds in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (third), in step 1850 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the distribution game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, if No in step 1611 (third), the process proceeds to step 1612.

Next, FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (third) of FIG. 87 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1852, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1852, the process proceeds to step 1866. On the other hand, if No in step 1852, in step 1854, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a long open symbol for the stopped main game symbol (the second big winning opening C20 is relatively long in the distribution game execution round). It is a jackpot symbol that opens the time, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1854, in step 1856, the CPUMC of the main control board M specifies a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 15 seconds, which is specified as an opening pattern of the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. An open pattern designed so that the ball enters the region C22 is deterministic), and the process proceeds to step 1860. If No in step 1854, in other words, if the stop symbol is 2A, in step 1858, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a short open pattern as an open pattern of the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. -N (for example, an opening pattern designed so that the non-ball entering the specific region C22 is deterministic with the opening for 0.1 seconds) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1860. In the third embodiment, the long open symbol on the first main game side is "5A / 7A", the ratio selected at the time of big hit is "524/1024", and the second main game The long open symbol on the side is "3B, 5B, 7B", and the ratio selected at the time of big hit is "1024/1024", so the second main game side is more than the big hit on the first main game side. The jackpot is configured so that the second big winning opening C20 is open for a long time in the distribution game execution round, that is, the game ball can easily enter the specific area C22 at the time of the jackpot.

Next, in step 1860, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1862, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game continuation flag. Next, in step 1864, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening C20 with the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1866.

Next, in step 1866, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of game balls have been won in the second large winning opening C20. .. If Yes in step 1866, the process proceeds to step 1870. On the other hand, if No in step 1866, in step 1868, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second special winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1868, the process proceeds to step 1870. Next, in step 1870, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second winning opening C20. Next, in step 1872, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game execution flag. Next, in step 1874, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. In the case of Yes in step 1874, in step 1876, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag and proceeds to step 1878. If No is set in step 1874, the process proceeds to step 1878. Next, in step 1878, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and shifts to the next process (process of step 1634). Even if No in step 1868, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1634).

Next, FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 of FIG. 87 in the third embodiment. First, the differences from the present embodiment are in step 1680 (third), step 1682 (third), step 1653 (third), step 1684 (third) and step 1686 (third). The purpose is that in the distribution game executed in the third embodiment, whether or not the transition to the probability fluctuation game state is possible and the upper limit of the number of fluctuations in the time reduction game state differ depending on whether or not the ball has entered the specific area C22. To let. That is, at the time of executing this subroutine, in step 1680 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1680 (third), in step 1682 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag. Next, in step 1653 (third) and step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the probability variation number counter MP51c to a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) and turns on the main game probability variation flag. .. Next, in step 1684 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times A (80 times in this example) in the time reduction counter MP52c and proceeds to step 1658, and thereafter, in steps 1658 and 1660. , The same process as in this embodiment is executed.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1680 (third), in step 1686 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M tells the time reduction counter MP52c a predetermined number of times B (in this example, 50 times, but this is Is not limited. A value of A or less is preferable for a predetermined number of times), and the process proceeds to step 1658.

Here, in the third embodiment, regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the specific area C22 during the special game, the time is shortened after the special game is completed. Further, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the number of fluctuations in the time-shortened game state after the special game is the same as the number of fluctuations in the probability-variable game state A. (80 times in this example), and if the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the special game, the number of fluctuations in the time-reduced game state after the special game is different from the predetermined number A (80 times). It is configured to be a predetermined number of times B (50 times in this example), which is a small number of times. As a result, even if the ball does not pass through the specific area C22 during the special game that facilitates entry into the specific area C22, a certain degree of advantageous period can be provided, and if the ball does not pass through the specific area C22. It can be expected to deter the decline in interest. Further, as for the variation mode of the main game symbol in the time-reduced game state, the three-stage limited frequency table (limited frequency table 1, limited frequency table 2 and limited frequency table 3) is used in the time-reduced game state of the predetermined number of times A. It is configured to refer to the main game table 3-2 in the time-reduced game state of a predetermined number of times B, and to refer to a table having a different effect content. It should be noted that the configuration is applied regardless of whether the jackpot symbols that triggered the execution of the special game are the same or different (for example, even if the special game is triggered by the same jackpot symbol, the special game is executed. The number of time reductions differs depending on whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22, etc.). Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper limit of the number of fluctuations in the time-saving game may be determined based on the symbol at the time of the big hit (for example, during the special game). If the ball is not entered in the specific area C22, the maximum number of fluctuations in the time-saving game is determined by the jackpot symbol, etc.).

Next, FIG. 90 is a time chart showing the volume of BGM during the jackpot in the third embodiment. First, at the timing of (1), the V entry round (a round that encourages whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22) provided in a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round) during the big hit starts. .. At this time, the volume of the BGM gradually decreases from the start of the round. Next, at the timing of (2), the ball enters the specific area C22 (V), and an SE indicating that the ball has entered is output. At this time, the volume of the SE indicating that the ball has entered the specific region C22 (V) is configured to be higher than the volume of the BGM. When the output of the SE indicating that the ball has entered the specific area C22 (V) is completed, the volume of the BGM gradually increases to the same volume as the volume before the start of the V entry round. Next, at the timing of (3), the big hit end demo time is reached. At the end of the jackpot demo time, the volume of BGM is a little low. Next, at the timing of (4), when the fluctuation start timing is reached, the volume is further reduced. That is, when the same song is output during the big hit and during the time saving, the volume of the song is "during the round> during the big hit end demo> changing". In addition, the volume at the start of the first rotation of the time reduction is the same as the volume during the big hit end demonstration, and the volume at the start of the first rotation of the time reduction and the start of the second rotation of the time reduction are different (at the start of the first rotation of the time reduction). > Time saving at the start of the second rotation).

In addition, during the big hit end demo time at the time of the first hit, the maker logo is displayed and the card ejection warning is alerted, and at the big hit end demo time at the first hit, the volume of the BGM is configured to be low. In the big hit after the first time, the volume of the BGM (musical piece) may not be reduced. Here, to summarize the volume of the sound (SE, etc.) that can be output at the same time as the volume of the BGM (musical piece), (1) the volume of the instruction sound such as SE or "right-handed" which is a sound effect is BGM ( It is louder than the volume of the music), (2) the volume of the SE at the time of entering the specific area C22 (V) is louder than the volume of the BGM (music) during the jackpot, and (3) when an error occurs during the jackpot. (For example, power recovery, door opening error, magnetic detection error, radio wave detection error, ball plate full tank error, etc.), the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) other than the error sound becomes zero. Alternatively, the volume of the error sound can be configured to be louder than the volume of the voice other than the error sound.

(Fourth Embodiment)
Next, FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a usage example of the button image. When the player can operate the sub-input button SB, the sub-input button SB can be operated by displaying the button image (operation member display) and the indicator image (gauge display) on the liquid crystal as one image. It suggests. If the button image (operation member display) and the indicator image (gauge display) are stored as separate images, it is necessary to control the display of the two images each time, which puts pressure on the capacity of the image ROM that stores the images. , And the processing load will increase. Therefore, by storing the button image (operating member display) and the indicator image (gauge display) as one image, it is possible to solve these problems. As a specific example of use, as shown in (a) Display other than during big hit, when the sub input button SB can be operated only once, the gauge is reduced in the indicator part according to the validity period. By performing image processing so as to go, it is configured to suggest to the player that the validity period is decreasing, and as shown in (b) Display during big hit, sub-input button SB many times during big hit. When the operation of is possible (buttons can be repeatedly pressed), one image composed of a button (operation member display) and an indicator (gauge display) is displayed, and image processing is performed so that the gauge decreases. This makes it possible to use one common image (an image composed of the operation member display and the gauge display) in any of the cases (a) and (b). Note that these are just examples, and the image of (b) may be displayed even if it is not during the big hit, suggesting that the sub input button SB can be repeatedly hit, and (a) during the big hit. It may be shown that the sub-input button SB can be operated only once. Further, when the sub input button SB can be repeatedly hit, the valid period may be indicated as shown in (a) in order to indicate the entire valid period. In addition, in the display other than during the jackpot (for example, in the normal state), five types of button colors are provided in descending order of expectation of jackpot: rainbow color> gold color> red color> green color> blue color. In the display during the big hit, only two types, red> blue, may be provided in descending order of probability change expectation and round promotion expectation. As an example of using the button image in (b), it is particularly effective when the validity period of the button is set at the end of a specific round (for example, at the end of two rounds).

It is also possible to have the following configuration.
(1) The memory of the indicator (gauge display) may be displayed as 0.
(2) Not limited to the effect that the sub input button SB can be repeatedly hit, but also applied to the effect that the player is made to select by using the sub input button SB (for example, the character is switched each time the button is pressed). May be good.
(3) Not limited to the indicator (gauge display), a numerical countdown display or the like may be used. When this configuration is applied to (b), it is desirable to always display the maximum value of the countdown or always display the minimum value of the countdown.
(4) If the same image composed of a button (operating member display) and an indicator (gauge display) is used in (a) and (b), the display mode (color, size, blinking) of one button is assumed. , Etc.) may be different.

In this example, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is illustrated, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the volume level adjustment, the light intensity level adjustment, or the automatic button operation is turned on in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine. -The configuration that enables off may be applied, or the configuration for the effect mode using the sub-input button SB, the cross key SB-2, and the lever SB-3 described above may be applied. Here, a supplementary explanation will be given to a well-known rotating body type game machine.

First, a well-known reel-type game machine displays a main board as a main game control unit that controls the progress of a game, a sub-board as a sub-game control unit that controls the execution of an effect, and identification information for the main game. A plurality of rows (generally three rows) of reels in which a plurality of identification information is arranged on the outer circumference as an identification information display unit for the main game, and a main game start that can be operated by the player and instructs the start of the game. It has a start lever as an instruction device and a stop button as a main game progress instruction device that can be operated by the player and instructs the game progress. Then, on the main board, a random number acquisition means for the main game that acquires a random number for the main game when the start lever is operated, and one or a plurality of stop identifications based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means for the main game. Identification information display content determination means for main game that provisionally determines information (for example, display content determination means that internally determines winning combinations such as small wins and special characters) and identification information display content determination for main game Based on one or more stop identification information tentatively determined by the means and the operation timing of the stop button, the main control is controlled so that one stop identification information is confirmed and displayed on the reel which is the main game identification information display unit. Game identification information display control means (for example, reel control means that stops the reel at a predetermined position based on an internally determined winning combination and the timing at which the stop button is pressed) and the main game identification information display. When a predetermined mode is displayed as stop identification information on the reel, which is a unit, special game execution control means (for example, "777 etc.") for controlling the transition to the special game are lined up on the predetermined effective line. As an opportunity, a special character operating means for operating the special character), a main game side information transmission control means for transmitting information on the main game random number acquired by the main game random number acquisition means to the sub-game control unit side, and have.

Regarding the sub-game control unit side in the rotating cylinder type game machine having such a well-known configuration, the sub-input buttons (sub-input button SB, cross key SB-2, lever SB-3) of the present embodiment are collectively referred to as sub-input buttons. It is possible to apply a configuration related to an effect of operating (sometimes referred to as). Specifically, a configuration in which the auto-continuous hitting effect is executed when the sub-input button is continuously pressed, and when the sub-input button is started to be pressed during the auto-continuous hitting acceptance period and the pressing of the sub-input button is maintained. The operation of the sub-input button is such that the continuous striking effect is executed from the start timing of the button continuous striking validity period, and the effect executed when the player operates the sub-input button such as the button continuous striking effect without operating the sub-input button. The configuration that can be executed without doing, the configuration that can execute the hidden button effect, etc. can also be applied to the rotating game machine. In addition, when applied to a rotating game machine, one bet button {a mechanism for enabling input of the number of bets (number of bets)} is configured to play the same role as the sub input button. The mechanism may be configured to have multiple uses.

In addition, each embodiment and the configuration described in this specification may be combined respectively. For example, by combining the present embodiment and the second embodiment, small hits frequently occur on the second main game side. Moreover, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of selecting music, and by combining the present embodiment and the third embodiment, it is possible to provide a VST machine and a game machine capable of selecting music.

M main control board,
MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP11t-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C1 1st main game timer, MP11t-C2 2nd main game timer MP22t-B 2nd main game Start port Electric accessory release timer, MP33c Winning ball counter MP34t Special game timer, MP52c Time reduction counter A 1st main game peripheral device A10 1st main game start port (1st main game start port A), A11s 1st main Game start port entry ball detection device A20 1st main game symbol display device, A21g 1st main game symbol display unit A21h 1st main game symbol hold display unit, B 2nd main game peripheral device B10 2nd main game symbol display unit, B11s 2nd main game start port entry ball detection device B11d 2nd main game start port electric accessory, B20 2nd main game symbol display device B21g 2nd main game symbol display unit, B21h 2nd main game symbol hold display unit C 1st・ 2nd main game shared peripheral device, C10 1st big prize opening C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection device, C11d 1st big winning opening electric accessory C20 2nd big winning opening, C21s 2nd big winning opening winning detection device C21d 2nd prize opening electric accessory, YK movable accessory H auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 auxiliary game start port H11s auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device, H20 auxiliary game symbol display device H21g auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h Auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S Sub control board, SM effect display control means (sub main control board)
SM21t drawing fluctuation time management timer,
SS effect display means (sub-sub control unit), SG effect display device SG10 display area, SG11 decorative symbol display area SG12 1st hold display unit, SG13 2nd hold display unit SB sub input button, SB-2 cross key SB-3 lever , HY10t Non-game period measurement timer ME10t Error state retention period timer, D26 Game effect lamp D70 Power saving mode display lamp, D42 Launch handle KH Prize ball payout control board KE Prize ball payout device, MT10 Command transmission buffer

Claims (1)

An effect display device that displays a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game,
A speaker that outputs a predetermined production sound according to the progress of the game,
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player
It has a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state.
Has a special game that is executed by winning a lottery in a normal state or a special state,
After the special game is over, the special state can be executed,
During the special game, the BGM selection screen for changing the BGM output from the speaker can be displayed on the effect display device.
When the BGM selection screen is displayed, the BGM that can be output can be selected by operating the operation means.
In the situation where the BGM selection screen is displayed, the selected BGM can be determined after a predetermined time has elapsed.
When the operation means is operated and the BGM selection is changed in the situation where the BGM selection screen is displayed, the BGM can be output from the output start point of the selected BGM.
In the situation where the BGM selection screen is displayed, when a predetermined time elapses and the selected BGM is determined, the BGM is output from the beginning of the determined BGM.
In the situation where the BGM selection screen is displayed, if the power is cut off when the predetermined time has not passed and the BGM has not been determined, and then the power is restored, the notification is output only when the power is restored. Is configured so that BGM cannot be selected while executing
The BGM data used when the operation means is operated and the BGM selection is changed in the situation where the BGM selection screen is displayed is predetermined in the situation where the BGM selection screen is displayed. This data is different from the BGM data used when the selected BGM is determined over time.
In the situation where the BGM selection screen is displayed, the BGM data used when the operating means is operated and the BGM selection is changed is composed of at least a time longer than a predetermined time.
The BGM selected during the special game can be output even in the special state executed after the end of the special game, and when a new special game is executed during the special state, the new special game is executed. It can be output even during special games,
The BGM selected during the special game can be continuously output at a lower volume than during the special game even during the end effect executed at the end of the special game, while is executed after the end of the special game. A game machine characterized in that it is not output during the start effect executed at the start of a new special game executed during the special state.

Images